Data Elecin

SUB ESTACION MODULAR COMPACTA 24KV, 20KA 60Hz.
FUNDICION CHILCA CHILCA - LIMA FUNDICION CHILCA S.A.
EXPEDIENTE TECNICO
PI: 100.12.160 P.I 100.12.212 FABRICADO POR ELECIN S.A. NOVIEMBRE 2012
Oficina: Av. San Luis 1986 308, San Borja, Lima Per, Tf.(51-1)715-1168 Fbrica: Las Fraguas 167 Urb.Industrial El Naranjal - Independencia, Lima-Per Tf. (51-1)715-0952 e-mail: ventas@elecinsa.com; ingenieria@elecinsa.com; web: www.elecinperu.com
II.- INDICE
I.- PORTADA II.- INDICE III.- DOCUMENTACION TECNICA - Listado de Aparatos IV.- PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS DE LOS EQUIPOS Protocolo de Transformador Seco 3000kva. Protocolo de Transformador Seco 1000kva. Protocolo de Sub Estacin. Protocolo de Rel de Proteccin. Protocolo de Medidor Multifuncin. Protocolo de Transformador de Corriente de Fase. Protocolo de Transformador de Tensin.
V.- ESQUEMAS DIMENSIONALES YFUNCIONALES - Plano de Disposicin y Dimensiones. - Plano Elctrico Funcional. VI.- ANEXOS
- Manuales de Equipos varios.
III.- DOCUMENTACION TECNICA
LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA POS DENOMINACIN 1 CELDAS DE 24KV, 20KA 1.1 CELDA MODULAR DE LLEGADA 24kV, 20KA, 60Hz Cubierta frontal : Plancha LAF 2,0mm Cubierta lateral : Plancha LAF 2,0mm Cubierta intermedia : Plancha LAF 1,5mm Cubierta posterior : Plancha LAF 2,0mm Techo plano : Plancha LAF 2,0mm Altura de instalacin : 1000 m.s.n.m. Ejecucin : IP3X, para Interior Pintura : Electrosttica, color RAL 2004 Luna Visora : No Dimensiones : Ancho = 750 mm Profundidad = 1,000 mm Altura = 1,950 mm Barras colectoras (M.T.) : 10x30 mm Barra de Tierra : 3x25 mm Aislador Portabarra (M.T.) : Resina de 24kV Equipamiento : Interruptor de potencia con camara de extincion de arco en vacio. Caractersticas: Tensin nominal : 24kV Corriente nominal : 630A Poder de corte : 20kA BIL : 125kV Tensin de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kV Ejecucin : Interior Montaje : Lateral Accesorios: - Bobina de apertura en 24Vcc - Bobina de cierre en 24Vcc - Motor para carga de resorte en 24Vcc. - Contactos auxiliares 6NC+6NA - Chapa de enclavamiento, incluye llave Ronies - Sealizacin de posicin. - Contador de operaciones. - Manivela de operacin manual - Llave de bloqueo con seccionador de linea Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 1/10
CANT
1 1
TIPO SYStem6 ITB ACC-347-381
MARCA SAREL SAREL 500.12.038R1 (Item-01)
52
WL N 5764-2012
SAREL
89L Seccionador de potencia tripolar, uso interior, de apertura de arco en SF6, mando manual para maniobra desde el frentre de la celda. Caractersticas: Tensin nominal : 24kV Corriente nominal : 630A Poder de cierre Ith : 20kA OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 :
IM6SC-TD N 71993-2012
SAREL
Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.
Av. San Luis 1986 308, San Borja, Lima Per, Tf/Fax.(51-1)715-1168 Fbrica: Las Fraguas 167 Urb. El Naranjal-Independencia, Lima-Per Tf/Fax. (51-1)715-0952 ventas@elecinsa.com, ingenieria@elecinsa.com web:www.elecinperu.com

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA DENOMINACIN BIL : 125kV Tensin de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kV Ejecucin : Fija Montaje : Lateral Accesorios: - Placa de caractersticas - Palanca de mando - Seccionador de puesta a tierra PAT, enclavamiento mecnico con 89L - Aisladores capacitivos de 24kv y lampara de sealizacion - Mecanismo de operacin KS AT1-3 - Aislador capacitivo de 24kV, 60Hz. LAC - Lamparas sealizadoras de presencia de tension TI1-3 Transformador de corriente monofsico, fabricado con ncleo de fierro silicoso de grano orientado, y arrollamientos de cobre electrolco de alta conductividad, encapsulado en resina epxica. Caractersticas: Aplicacin : Medicion/Proteccin Potencia : 15/15VA Relacin : 200-400/5-5A Clase de precisin : 0.2/5P20 Frecuencia : 60Hz N de fases : 1 Clase de aislamiento : F Nivel de aislamiento AT : 24/50/125kV Nivel de aislamiento BT : 0.6/3.0kV Intensidad trmica : 20kA Intensidad dinmica : 2.5Ith Sobrintensidad admisible : 120% Altitud de operacin : 1 000m.s.n.m. Montaje : Interior Servicio : Contnuo Norma de fabricacin : IEC 60044-1 Ao de fabricacin : 2012 Accesorios: - Placa de caracterstricas - Tapa de bornes en el lado de B.T. - Borne para conexin de puesta a tierra. - Base metlica para fijacin. Rel trifsico digital multifuncin. Caractersticas: Funciones de Proteccin Tensin auxiliar In fase OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 : F1 POS Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 2/10
CANT
TIPO
MARCA
3 3 1 3
INS-24-225-C01
SAREL SAREL
TESAR 500.12.029 (Item-03) N 2012-15-0175-03-04 N 2012-15-0175-03-05 N 2012-15-0175-03-06
AB13
1 : 27, 49, 50/51, 50N/51N, 79 : 24Vcc : 1/5A
NA60 N 168961
THYTRONIC 500.12.058R1 (Item-02)

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA POS DENOMINACIN In neutro : 1/5A Frecuencia : 60Hz Accesorios: - Entradas digitales : 3 - Salidas digitales : 3 - Puertos de comunicacin : RS232/RS485 - Protocolos : ModBus RTU/IEC 60870-5-103 Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 3/10
CANT
TIPO
MARCA
Cargador de bateras. Caractersticas: Potencia salida Tensin de entrada Tensin de salida Corriente salida Accesorios: - Contacto de salida NA n1,2 Batera secas, 12Vcc, 7A-H, 35 A/arr. 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4
u1
1 : : : : 72 220 24 5 W. Vac. Vcc. A.
DSE9250-001
N 367615
DEEP SEA ELECTRONIC
: Falla de carga 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M. NP7-12 C60N C60N C60N C60N BCH Xpole Pls4 XB4-BA31 XB4-BA42 XB4-BV63 XB4-BV64 C16 S/T YUASA Schneider Schneider Schneider Schneider Ital Weber Moeller Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique Fantini Cosmi SAREL
Disyuntor de control Tripolar, 2A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. Disyuntor de control bipolar, 2A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. Disyuntor de control bipolar, 6A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. Disyuntor de control bipolar, 4A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac.
-FC Bornera porta fusible bipolar, 4A gG, 32A 690vac -Q1 Disyuntor de control unipolar, 6A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. S1 S2 H1 H2 TC Pulsador plano para Abrir Interruptor , 12A, 690V, y contactos 1NA, color verde, 22mm. Pulsador plano para Cerrar Interruptor , 12A, 690V, y contactos 1NA, color rojo, 22mm. Portalmpara con lmpara-led de sealizacin, Interruptor Abierto 24Vcc, color verde, F 22mm. Portalmpara con lmpara-led de sealizacin, Interruptor Cerrado 24Vcc, color rojo, F 22mm. Termostato de ambiente 0 - 30C, 250Vac, IP30
RC1 Resistencia de calefaccin 150W, 220 Vac Juego de Terminales de 24KV para cable unipolar N2XSY de 240mm.
Soporte para cable unipolar seco, 24kV. OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 :

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 4/10
CANT
POS DENOMINACIN M1 Medidor electrnico multifuncin 5A, 57-240V, 60Hz, que mide los siguientes parmetros , Energa activa, Energa reactiva, V, I, f.p, MD kW, MDkVar, 4 cuadrantes, perfil de carga; clase 0.2, 3 fases, 4 hilos, puerto ptico RS232, puerto de comunicacin RS485. CELDA TOMA DE TENSION DE BARRAS Celda autosoportada de ejecucion similar a Item 1.1 Estructura : Plancha doblada 2.5mm Dimensiones : Ancho = 500 mm Profundidad = 1,000 mm Altura = 1,950 mm Barras colectoras (M.T.) : 10x30 mm Barras derivacin (M.T.) : mm Barra de Tierra : 3 x 25 mm Aislador Portabarra (M.T.) : Resina de 24kV Equipamiento : 89P Seccionador de potencia tripolar, uso interior, de apertura de arco en SF6, mando manual para maniobra desde el frentre de la celda. Caractersticas: Tensin nominal : 24kV Corriente nominal : 630A Corriente de Interrupcin : 630A Poder de cierre : 40kA Corriente de corta duracin Ith : 20kA BIL : 125kV Tensin de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kV Ejecucin : Fija Montaje : Lateral Accesorios: - Placa de caractersticas - Palanca de mando - Bases portafusibles de 200A, con sistema de desconexin automtica a la fusin de cualquiera de los fusibles. - Enclavamiento mecnico con la puerta - Mecanismo de operacin KP - Bobina de disparo 24Vcc. - Block de contactos auxiliares - Aislador capacitivo de 24kV, 60Hz. - Lmpara de presencia de tensin. -FC Bornera porta fusible bipolar, 2A gG, 32A 690vac -Q1 Disyuntor de control unipolar, 6A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. TC Termostato de ambiente 0 - 30C, 250Vac, IP30 OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 : 1.2
TIPO A1R-LQ+ N 14643644
MARCA ELSTER
MV
SAREL (500.12.038R1) (Item-02)
IM6P-TF N 71994-2012
SAREL
3 1 1 1 1
INS-24-225-C01
SAREL SAREL Ital Weber Moeller Fantini Cosmi
BCH Xpole Pls4 C16

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA POS DENOMINACIN RC1 Resistencia de calefaccin 150W, 220 Vac FU1,3 Cartucho fusible de alto poder de ruptura 24kV, para trafo de tensin. TT1-3 Transformador de tension monofsico, fabricado con ncleo de fierro silicoso de grano orientado, y arrollamientos de cobre electroltico de alta conductividad, encapsulado en resina epxica. Caractersticas: Aplicacin : Medida/Proteccion Potencia : 30-50VA Relacin : 24:3/0.24:3-0.24:3kV Clase de precisin : 0.2 Grupo de conexin : IiO Frecuencia : 60Hz. N de fases : 1 Clase de aislamiento : F Nivel de aislamiento AT : 24/50/125kV. Nivel de aislamiento BT : 0,6/3kV Enfriamiento : SNAN Altitud de operacin : 1000 m.s.n.m. Montaje : Interior. Servicio : Contnuo Norma de fabricacin : IEC 60044-1 Ao de fabricacin : 2012 Accesorios: - Placa de caracterstricas - Tapa de bornes en el lado de BT. - Borne para conexin de puesta a tierra. CELDA MODULAR DE SALIDA N 1,3,4,5 24kV, 60Hz Celda autosoportada de ejecucion similar a Item 1.1 Estructura : Plancha doblada 2.5mm Dimensiones : Ancho = 750 mm Profundidad = 1,000 mm Altura = 1,950 mm Barras colectoras (M.T.) : 10x30 mm Barras derivacin (M.T.) : mm Barra de Tierra : 3 x 25 mm Aislador Portabarra (M.T.) : Resina de 24kV Equipamiento : 89L Seccionador de potencia tripolar, uso interior, de apertura de arco en SF6, mando manual para maniobra desde el frentre de la celda. Caractersticas: Tensin nominal : 24kV Corriente nominal : 630A OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 : 1.3 Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 5/10
CANT
1 3 3
TIPO S/T
MARCA SAREL
VFB11
TESAR (500.11.049) (Item-05) N 2012-15-0175-04-02 N 2012-15-0175-04-03 N 2012-15-0684-05-06
ITI
SAREL (500.12.038R1) (Item-03)
IM6S-TD N 71996-2012 N 72000-2012 N 71995-2012 N 71998-2012 Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.
SAREL

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA DENOMINACIN Poder de cierre Ith : 20kA BIL : 125kV Tensin de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kV Ejecucin : Fija Montaje : Lateral Accesorios: - Placa de caractersticas - Palanca de mando - Seccionador de tierra (enclavamiento mecnico) - Aisladores capacitivos de 24kv y lampara de sealizacion - Mecanismo de operacin KS AT1-3 - Aislador capacitivo de 24kV, 60Hz. LAC 52 - Lamparas sealizadoras de presencia de tension Interruptor de potencia con camara de extincion de arco en vacio. Caractersticas: Tensin nominal : 24kV Corriente nominal : 630A Poder de corte : 20kA BIL : 125kV Tensin de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kV Ejecucin : Interior Montaje : Lateral Accesorios: - Bobina de apertura en 24Vcc - Bobina de cierre en 24Vcc - Motor para carga de resorte en 24Vcc. - Contactos auxiliares 6NC+6NA - Chapa de enclavamiento, incluye llave Ronies - Sealizacin de posicin. - Contador de operaciones. - Manivela de operacin manual - Llave de bloqueo con seccionador de linea POS Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 6/10
CANT
TIPO
MARCA
3 3 1 1 WL N 5763-2012 N 5766-2012 N 5767-2012

N 5768-2012
INS-24-225-C01
SAREL SAREL SAREL
TI1-3 Transformador de corriente monofsico, fabricado con ncleo de fierro silicoso de grano orientado, y arrollamientos de cobre electrolco de alta conductividad, encapsulado en resina epxica. Caractersticas: | Aplicacin : Medicion/Proteccin Potencia : 15/15VA Relacin : 100-200/5-5A Clase de precisin : 0.2/5P20 Frecuencia : 60Hz N de fases : 1 OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 :
TESAR (500.12.029) (Item-02) N 2012-15-0408-02-04 N 2012-15-0408-02-05 N 2012-15-0408-02-06 N 2012-15-0408-02-01 N 2012-15-0408-02-02 N 2012-15-0408-02-03 Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.
AB16

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA POS DENOMINACIN Clase de aislamiento : F Nivel de aislamiento AT : 24/50/125kV Nivel de aislamiento BT : 0.6/3.0kV Intensidad trmica : 20kA Intensidad dinmica : 2.5Ith Sobrintensidad admisible : 120% Altitud de operacin : 1 000m.s.n.m. Montaje : Interior Servicio : Contnuo Norma de fabricacin : IEC 60044-1 Ao de fabricacin : 2011 Accesorios: - Placa de caracterstricas - Tapa de bornes en el lado de B.T. - Borne para conexin de puesta a tierra. - Base metlica para fijacin. Rel trifsico digital multifuncin. Caractersticas: Funciones de Proteccin : 50/51, 50N/51N, 79 Tensin auxiliar : 24Vcc In fase : 1/5A In neutro : 1/5A Frecuencia : 60Hz Accesorios: - Entradas digitales : 3 - Salidas digitales : 3 - Puertos de comunicacin : RS232/RS485 - Protocolos : ModBus RTU/IEC 60870-5-103 Disyuntor de control bipolar, 2A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. Disyuntor de control bipolar, 6A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 7/10
CANT
TIPO MARCA N 2012-15-0408-03-04 N 2012-15-0408-03-05 N 2012-15-0408-03-06 N 2012-15-0408-02-10 N 2012-15-0408-02-11 N 2012-15-0408-02-12
F1
NA011
THYTRONIC (500.12.058R1) (Item-01)
N 165271 N 165274 N 166438 N 166435
8.1 8.2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C60N C60N
BCH
Schneider Schneider
Ital Weber
-FC Bornera porta fusible bipolar, 4A gG, 32A 690vac -Q1 Disyuntor de control unipolar, 6A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. Pulsador plano para Abrir Interruptor , 12A, 690V, y contactos 1NA, color verde, 22mm. S2 Pulsador plano para Cerrar Interruptor , 12A, 690V, y contactos 1NA, color rojo, 22mm. H1 Portalmpara con lmpara-led de sealizacin, Interruptor Abierto 24Vcc, color verde, F 22mm. H2 Portalmpara con lmpara-led de sealizacin, Interruptor Cerrado 24Vcc, color rojo, F 22mm. OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 : S1
Xpole Pls4 XB4-BA31 XB4-BA42 XB4-BV63 XB4-BV64
Moeller Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA POS DENOMINACIN TC Termostato de ambiente 0 - 30C, 250Vac, IP30 RC1 Resistencia de calefaccin 150W, 220 Vac 1.4 Juego de Terminales de 24KV para cable unipolar N2XSY de 50mm. Soporte para cable unipolar seco, 24kV. Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 8/10
CANT
1 1 1 1 2
TIPO C16 S/T
MARCA Fantini Cosmi SAREL
CELDA MODULAR DE SALIDA N 2,6 24kV, 60Hz Celda autosoportada de ejecucion similar a Item 1.1 Estructura : Plancha doblada 2.5mm Dimensiones : Ancho = 750 mm Profundidad = 1,000 mm Altura = 1,950 mm Barras colectoras (M.T.) : 10x30 mm Barras derivacin (M.T.) : mm Barra de Tierra : 3 x 25 mm Aislador Portabarra (M.T.) : Resina de 24kV Equipamiento : 89L Seccionador de potencia tripolar, uso interior, de apertura de arco en SF6, mando manual para maniobra desde el frentre de la celda. Caractersticas: Tensin nominal : 24kV Corriente nominal : 630A Poder de cierre Ith : 20kA BIL : 125kV Tensin de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kV Ejecucin : Fija Montaje : Lateral Accesorios: - Placa de caractersticas - Palanca de mando - Seccionador de tierra (enclavamiento mecnico) - Aisladores capacitivos de 24kv y lampara de sealizacion - Mecanismo de operacin KS AT1-3 - Aislador capacitivo de 24kV, 60Hz. LAC 52 - Lamparas sealizadoras de presencia de tension
ITI
SAREL (500.12.038R1) (Item-03)
IM6S-TD N 71997-2012 N71999-2012
SAREL
3 3 1 1 WL N 5765-2012 N 5769-2012
INS-24-225-C01
SAREL SAREL SAREL
Interruptor de potencia con camara de extincion de arco en vacio. Caractersticas: Tensin nominal : 24kV Corriente nominal : 630A Poder de corte : 20kA BIL : 125kV OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 :

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA POS DENOMINACIN Tensin de ensayo (60Hz) : 50kV Ejecucin : Interior Montaje : Lateral Accesorios: - Bobina de apertura en 24Vcc - Bobina de cierre en 24Vcc - Motor para carga de resorte en 24Vcc. - Contactos auxiliares 6NC+6NA - Chapa de enclavamiento, incluye llave Ronies - Sealizacin de posicin. - Contador de operaciones. - Manivela de operacin manual - Llave de bloqueo con seccionador de linea Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 9/10
CANT
TIPO
MARCA
TI1-3 Transformador de corriente monofsico, fabricado con ncleo de fierro silicoso de grano orientado, y arrollamientos de cobre electrolco de alta conductividad, encapsulado en resina epxica. Caractersticas: Aplicacin : Medicion/Proteccin Potencia : 15/15VA Relacin : 50-100/5-5A Clase de precisin : 0.2/5P20 Frecuencia : 60Hz N de fases : 1 Clase de aislamiento : F Nivel de aislamiento AT : 24/50/125kV Nivel de aislamiento BT : 0.6/3.0kV Intensidad trmica : 20kA Intensidad dinmica : 2.5Ith Sobrintensidad admisible : 120% Altitud de operacin : 1 000m.s.n.m. Montaje : Interior Servicio : Contnuo Norma de fabricacin : IEC 60044-1 Ao de fabricacin : 2011 Accesorios: - Placa de caracterstricas - Tapa de bornes en el lado de B.T. - Borne para conexin de puesta a tierra. - Base metlica para fijacin. Rel trifsico digital multifuncin. Caractersticas: Funciones de Proteccin Tensin auxiliar OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 : F1
TESAR (500.12.029) (Item-01) N 2012-15-0408-01-04 N 2012-15-0408-01-05 N 2012-15-0408-01-06 N 2012-15-0408-01-01 N 2012-15-0408-01-02 N 2012-15-0408-01-03
AB16
1 : 50/51, 50N/51N, 79 : 24Vcc
NA011 N 165275 N 165276
THYTRONIC (500.12.058R1) (Item-01)

CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. OBRA : CELDAS 24kV, 20kA CHILCA -LIMA POS DENOMINACIN In fase : 1/5A In neutro : 1/5A Frecuencia : 60Hz Accesorios: - Entradas digitales : 3 - Salidas digitales : 3 - Puertos de comunicacin : RS232/RS485 - Protocolos : ModBus RTU/IEC 60870-5-103 Disyuntor de control bipolar, 2A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. Disyuntor de control bipolar, 6A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. Fecha: 9-ago-2012 Pag: 10/10
CANT
TIPO
MARCA
8.1 8.2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C60N C60N
BCH
Schneider Schneider
Ital Weber
-FC Bornera porta fusible bipolar, 4A gG, 32A 690vac -Q1 Disyuntor de control unipolar, 6A, 440Vac, 20kA@230-400Vac. S1 S2 H1 H2 TC Pulsador plano para Abrir Interruptor , 12A, 690V, y contactos 1NA, color verde, 22mm. Pulsador plano para Cerrar Interruptor , 12A, 690V, y contactos 1NA, color rojo, 22mm. Portalmpara con lmpara-led de sealizacin, Interruptor Abierto 24Vcc, color verde, F 22mm. Portalmpara con lmpara-led de sealizacin, Interruptor Cerrado 24Vcc, color rojo, F 22mm. Termostato de ambiente 0 - 30C, 250Vac, IP30
Xpole Pls4 XB4-BA31 XB4-BA42 XB4-BV63 XB4-BV64 C16 S/T
Moeller Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique Fantini Cosmi SAREL
RC1 Resistencia de calefaccin 150W, 220 Vac Juego de Terminales de 24KV para cable unipolar N2XSY de 50mm. Soporte para cable unipolar seco, 24kV.
OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 :
IV.- PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS DE LOS EQUIPOS
PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS
CLIENTE : FUNDICION CHILCA S.A. P.I. : 100.12.212
EQUIPO: SUB ESTACION MODULAR COMPACTA 24KV, 20KA, 60Hz.
PRUEBA REALIZADA
VERIFICACIN DE METRADO VERIFICACIN DE ESPECIFICACIONES TCNICAS VERIFICACIN DE DIMENSIONES EXTERNAS PRUEBA DE CONTINUIDAD DE CIRCUITOS PRUEBA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO ELCTRICO PRUEBA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO MECNICO PRUEBA DE AISLAMIENTO Valores (MegaOhmios) R - MASA S - MASA T - MASA N - MASA FASE R - S FASE S - T FASE T - R FASE R - N FASE S - N FASE T - N = = = = = = = = = = M.T. 1210 1330 1370 > 5000 > 5000 > 5000 B.T. GW GW GW GW GW GW GW GW GW GW
RESULTADO
CONFORME CONFORME CONFORME CONFORME CONFORME CONFORME CONFORME
OBSERVACIONES
Sub Estacin Modular 24KV, 20KA, 60Hz. N ACC-347-381 N 2012.00.0427
M.T. : 5 kVcc B.T. : 500Vcc MD5060e MEGABRAS
PRUEBA DE TENSION APLICADA 50kV, 1min, 60Hz FASE R - MASA FASE S - MASA FASE T - MASA FASE R,S,T - MASA = = = = 5.70 5.70 5.70 6.25 mA mA mA mA
CONFORME
Transformador de Prueba 81000/220 V
Aplicada a Barras Colectoras y Aisladores Porta Barra Tec. Fernando Castillo Oliva
CONTROL DE CALIDAD
Probado por:
Fecha : 23-noviembre-2012 Supervisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya Miranda Fecha : 23-noviembre-2012 Cliente: Fecha : 23-noviembre-2012
Av. San Luis 1986 308, San Borja, Lima Per, Tf/Fax.(51-1) 715-1168 Fbrica: Las Fraguas 167 Urb. El Naranjal-Independencia, Lima-Per Tf/Fax. (51-1)715-0952 ventas@elecinsa.com, ingenieria@elecinsa.com web:www.elecinperu.com
VERBALE DI COLLAUDO TRASFORMATORI DI CORRENTE
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS TEST REPORT RAPPORT DE ESSAI TRANSFORMATEURS DE COURANT

Cliente Equipos Electroindustriales S.A. Conferma 2012.15.0175 Posizione 03 Matr. 0175-03-01 a
VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
0175-03-06
Client Client
Acknowledge Confirmation
Item Position
S/N Matr.
to at
Tipo
AB13
Livello di isolamento [kV] 24 / 50 / 125
Frequenza [Hz]
60
Ith 20 kA
/ 1s
Type Type CARACTERISTIQUES

CARATTERISTICHE
Insulation level Niveau disolement

200-400
Frequency Frequence
15 / 0,2 Fs
CHARACTERISTICS
Rapporto [A/A]
/ 5 / 5
Prestazione [VA / Cl.]
Ratio Rapport
Burden Prestation
Prestazione [VA / Cl.] 15 / 5P20 Fs
Burden Prestation
Fs
Burden Prestation
a) Verifica dei contrassegni dei terminali (8.1)
Verification of terminals markings Vrification du marquage des bornes

b) Prova di tenuta a frequenza industriale dell'avvolgimento primario (8.2.1)
50 kV x 60 s

40 kV x 60 s 28,8 kV x 30 s 16,6 kV x 30 s 3 kV x 60 s
Power-Frequency withstand test on primary winding Essais dilectriques frequence industrille des enroulementes primaires
ESSAIS GENERAUX - STANDARDS CEI EN 60044-1 IEC 60044-1 ROUTINE TESTS - STANDARDS CEI EN 60044-1 IEC 60044-1
PROVE INDIVIDUALI - NORME CEI EN 60044-1 IEC 60044-1
c) Misura delle scariche parziali (8.2.2 / Proc. B)
Partial discharge measurement Mesure des dcharges partielles

* Tensione Presollecitazione / Prestressing Voltage / Tension de prestress * Tensione Misura 1 / Measure Voltage 1 / Tension de mesure 1 * Tensione Misura 2 / Measure Voltage 2 / Tension de mesure 2 d) Prova di tenuta a frequenza industriale degli avvolgimenti secondari (8.3)
Power-Frequency withstand test on secondary windings Essais dilectriques frequence industrille des enroulementes secondaires
e) Prove di tenuta a frequenza industriale tra sezioni (8.3)
3 kV x 60 s
Power-Frequency withstand tests between sections Essais dilectriques frequence industrille entre les sections
f) Prova di sovratensione tra le spire a 250 Hz (8.4 / Proc B)
Up [V] (1 x In) x 24 s
Inter-Turn overvoltage test at 250 Hz Essais de surtension entre spires 250 Hz

g) Determinazione degli errori (11.5 / 12.4 / 12.6)
Determination of errors Determination des erreurs

I RISULTATI DELLE PROVE SODDISFANO I REQUISITI IMPOSTI DALLE NORME CEI EN/IEC 60044-1
TEST RESULTS ARE IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS CEI EN/IEC 60044-1 LES RESULTAT DES ESSAIS SATISFONS LES CONDITIONS IMPOSE PAR LES STANDARDS CEI EN/IEC 60044-1
NOTES
NOTES
NOTE
Emesso il
24/04/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

Cliente
Equipos Electroindustriales S.A.
VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
Client Client
Tipo
AB13
Conferma 2012.15.0175
Posizione
03
Item Position
S/N Matr.
Frequenza [Hz]
Matr.
0175-03-01
to at
Ith
20 kA / 1 s
0175-03-06
CHARACTERISTICS CARACTERISTIQUES
CARATTERISTICHE
Type Type
Rapporto[A/A]
Livello di isolamento [kV]
24 / 50 / 125
60

200-400
Frequency Frequence
15
Ratio Rapport
/ / /
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
Burden Prestation
5
/ / /
0,2
Fs Fs Fs
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
15
5P20
Burden Prestation Burden Prestation
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
INSTRUMENT SECURITY FACTOR VERIFICATION VERIFICATION DU FACTEUR DE SECURITE ASSIGNE
VERIFICA DEL FATTORE DI SICUREZZA

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs Rs
[] []
Uexc [V] Uexc [V]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
Fs Fs
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
75
VERIFICA DELL' ERRORE COMPOSTO

COMPOSITE ERROR VERIFICATION VERIFICATION DES ERREUR COMPOSEE
75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
0175-03-01
MORSETTI 2S1-2S2
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs
[]
0,42
e.m.f.sl [V] e.m.f.sl [V]
96,9
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
0,18
c% c%
0,18
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs75 []
MISURA DEGLI ERRORI DI RAPPORTO E D'ANGOLO
CURRENT ERRORS AND PHASE DISPLACEMENT ERRORS MEASUREMENT MESURE DES ERREURS DU RAPPORT ET D'ANGLE
Matricola Rapporto
S/N Matricule
Ratio Raport
[A/A] 200-400/5
Sec.
Prest.
120% In
100% In
20% In
5% In
1% In
Sec. side secondaire

1S1-1S2
Burden Prest.
25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100%
%
0,12 -0,07
[crad]
0,04 -0,02
%
0,12 -0,08
[crad]
0,04 -0,01
%
0,10 -0,24
[crad]
0,08 0,07
%
0,07 -0,43
[crad]
0,16 0,22
[crad]
0175-03-01
ESSAIS GENERAUX - STANDARDS CEI 60044-1 IEC 60044-1
ROUTINE TESTS - STANDARDS CEI 60044-1 IEC 60044-1
PROVE INDIVIDUALI - NORME CEI 60044-1 IEC 60044-1
200-400/5
2S1-2S2
-0,09 0,13 -0,08
0 0,01 -0,03
200-400/5 0175-03-02 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,09 0,10 -0,09
-0,01 0,01 -0,03
200-400/5 0175-03-03 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,10 0,14 -0,05
-0,01 0,03 -0,01
200-400/5 0175-03-04 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,09 0,09 -0,10
0 0,04 -0,01
200-400/5 0175-03-05 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,09 0,13 -0,07
-0,01 0,04 0
200-400/5 0175-03-06 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,08
-0,01
I VALORI MISURATI RIENTRANO NEI LIMITI INDICATI NELLE TABELLE 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 DELLE CEI EN/IEC 60044-1
THE MEASURED VALUES ARE IN THE LIMITS INDICATED IN TABLE 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 OF CEI EN/IEC 60044-1 LES VALEURES MESURE SONT DANS LES LIMITS INDIQUE DANS LES TABLEAUX 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 DES CEI EN/IEC 60044-1
Emesso il
24/04/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
0408-01-12
Client Client
Item Position
S/N Matr.
to at
Tipo
AB16
Frequenza [Hz]
60
Ith 20 kA
/ 1s

CARATTERISTICHE

50-100
Frequency Frequence
15 / 0,2 Fs
CHARACTERISTICS
Rapporto [A/A]
/ 5 / 5
Ratio Rapport
Burden Prestation
Burden Prestation
Fs
Burden Prestation

50 kV x 60 s


3 kV x 60 s
Up [V] (1 x In) x 24 s


NOTES
NOTES
NOTE
Emesso il
25/07/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

Cliente
VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
Client Client
Tipo
AB16
Conferma 2012.15.0408
Posizione
01
Item Position
S/N Matr.
Frequenza [Hz]
Matr.
0408-01-01
to at
Ith
20 kA / 1 s
0408-01-12
CARATTERISTICHE
Type Type
Rapporto[A/A]
50-100
24 / 50 / 125
60
Frequency Frequence
15
Ratio Rapport
/ / /
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
Burden Prestation
5
/ / /
0,2
Fs Fs Fs
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
15
5P20
Prestazione [VA/Cl]

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs Rs
[] []
Uexc [V] Uexc [V]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
Fs Fs
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
75

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
0408-01-01
MORSETTI 2S1-2S2
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs
[]
0,27
83,2
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
1,25
c% c%
1,25
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs75 []
Matricola Rapporto
S/N Matricule
Ratio Raport
[A/A] 50-100/5
Sec.
Prest.
120% In
100% In
20% In
5% In
1% In

1S1-1S2
Burden Prest.
25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100%
%
0,17 -0,08
[crad]
0,12 0,06
%
0,17 -0,10
[crad]
0,13 0,07
%
0,06 -0,27
[crad]
0,23 0,17
%
-0,14 -0,54
[crad]
0,44 0,33
[crad]
0408-01-01
50-100/5
2S1-2S2
-0,21 0,17 -0,08
0,10 0,10 0,06
50-100/5 0408-01-02 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,22 0,16 -0,10
0,09 0,13 0,08
50-100/5 0408-01-03 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,18 0,15 -0,14
0,08 0,15 0,08
50-100/5 0408-01-04 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,21 0,15 -0,12
0,09 0,13 0,08
50-100/5 0408-01-05 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,20 0,18 -0,08
0,08 0,13 0,07
50-100/5 0408-01-06 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,23
0,10
Emesso il
25/07/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

Cliente
VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
Client Client
Tipo
AB16
Conferma 2012.15.0408
Posizione
01
Item Position
S/N Matr.
Frequenza [Hz]
Matr.
0408-01-01
to at
Ith
20 kA / 1 s
0408-01-12
CARATTERISTICHE
Type Type
Rapporto[A/A]
50-100
24 / 50 / 125
60
Frequency Frequence
15
Ratio Rapport
/ / /
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
Burden Prestation
5
/ / /
0,2
Fs Fs Fs
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
15
5P20
Prestazione [VA/Cl]

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs Rs
[] []
Uexc [V] Uexc [V]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
Fs Fs
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
75

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs
[]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
c% c%
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs75 []
Matricola Rapporto
S/N Matricule
Ratio Raport
[A/A] 50-100/5
Sec.
Prest.
120% In
100% In
20% In
5% In
1% In

1S1-1S2
Burden Prest.
25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100%
[crad]
%
0,16 -0,09
[crad]
0,10 0,06
[crad]
[crad]
[crad]
0408-01-07
50-100/5
2S1-2S2
-0,21 0,15 -0,11
0,10 0,12 0,06
50-100/5 0408-01-08 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,22 0,15 -0,11
0,09 0,12 0,07
50-100/5 0408-01-09 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,15 0,16 -0,10
0,07 0,15 0,08
50-100/5 0408-01-10 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,21 0,16 -0,11
0,11 0,13 0,07
50-100/5 0408-01-11 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,22 0,16 -0,10
0,10 0,14 0,08
50-100/5 0408-01-12 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,21
0,12
Emesso il
25/07/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

Cliente
VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
Client Client
Tipo
AB16
Conferma 2012.15.0408
Posizione
01
Item Position
S/N Matr.
Frequenza [Hz]
Matr.
0408-01-01
to at
Ith
20 kA / 1 s
0408-01-12
CARATTERISTICHE
Type Type
Rapporto[A/A]
50-100
24 / 50 / 125
60
Frequency Frequence
15
Ratio Rapport
/ / /
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
Burden Prestation
5
/ / /
0,2
Fs Fs Fs
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
15
5P20
Prestazione [VA/Cl]

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs Rs
[] []
Uexc [V] Uexc [V]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
Fs Fs
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
75

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs
[]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
c% c%
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs75 []
Matricola Rapporto
S/N Matricule
Ratio Raport
[A/A] 50-100/5
Sec.
Prest.
120% In
100% In
20% In
5% In
1% In

1S1-1S2
Burden Prest.
25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100%
[crad]
%
0,15 -0,11
[crad]
0,11 0,06
[crad]
[crad]
[crad]
0408-01-13
50-100/5
2S1-2S2
-0,25 0,14 -0,12
0,12 0,13 0,07
50-100/5 0408-01-14 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,21 0,17 -0,10
0,10 0,13 0,06
50-100/5 0408-01-15 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,19 0,17 -0,11
0,09 0,12 0,07
50-100/5 0408-01-16 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,22 0,16 -0,09
0,10 0,13 0,07
50-100/5 0408-01-17 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,21 0,15 -0,11
0,09 0,11 0,06
50-100/5 0408-01-18 50-100/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,23
0,09
Emesso il
25/07/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
0408-02-12
Client Client
Item Position
S/N Matr.
to at
Tipo
AB16
Frequenza [Hz]
60
Ith 20 kA
/ 1s

CARATTERISTICHE

100-200
Frequency Frequence
15 / 0,2 Fs
CHARACTERISTICS
Rapporto [A/A]
/ 5 / 5
Ratio Rapport
Burden Prestation
Burden Prestation
Fs
Burden Prestation

50 kV x 60 s


3 kV x 60 s
Up [V] (1 x In) x 24 s


NOTES
NOTES
NOTE
Emesso il
07/09/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

Cliente
VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
Client Client
Tipo
AB16
Conferma 2012.15.0408
Posizione
02
Item Position
S/N Matr.
Frequenza [Hz]
Matr.
0408-02-01
to at
Ith
20 kA / 1 s
0408-02-12
CARATTERISTICHE
Type Type
Rapporto[A/A]
24 / 50 / 125
60

100-200
Frequency Frequence
15
Ratio Rapport
/ / /
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
Burden Prestation
5
/ / /
0,2
Fs Fs Fs
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
15
5P20
Prestazione [VA/Cl]

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs Rs
[] []
Uexc [V] Uexc [V]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
Fs Fs
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
75

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
0408-02-01
MORSETTI 2S1-2S2
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs
[]
0,344
90
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
0,36
c% c%
0,36
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs75 []
Matricola Rapporto
S/N Matricule
Ratio Raport
[A/A] 100-200/5
Sec.
Prest.
120% In
100% In
20% In
5% In
1% In

1S1-1S2
Burden Prest.
25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100%
%
0,16 -0,07
[crad]
0,12 0,07
%
0,16 -0,08
[crad]
0,12 0,08
%
0,11 -0,22
[crad]
0,19 0,18
%
0,01 -0,40
[crad]
0,34 0,33
[crad]
0408-02-01
100-200/5
2S1-2S2
-0,15 0,15 -0,07
0,07 0,12 0,07
100-200/5 0408-02-02 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,22 0,14 -0,06
0,05 0,13 0,08
100-200/5 0408-02-03 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,13 0,16 -0,08
0,07 0,10 0,06
100-200/5 0408-02-04 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,17 0,15 -0,08
0,03 0,09 0,05
100-200/5 0408-02-05 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,15 0,13 -0,05
0,09 0,13 0,08
100-200/5 0408-02-06 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,13
0,05
Emesso il
07/09/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

Cliente
VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
Client Client
Tipo
AB16
Conferma 2012.15.0408
Posizione
02
Item Position
S/N Matr.
Frequenza [Hz]
Matr.
0408-02-01
to at
Ith
20 kA / 1 s
0408-02-12
CARATTERISTICHE
Type Type
Rapporto[A/A]
24 / 50 / 125
60

100-200
Frequency Frequence
15
Ratio Rapport
/ / /
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
Burden Prestation
5
/ / /
0,2
Fs Fs Fs
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
15
5P20
Prestazione [VA/Cl]

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs Rs
[] []
Uexc [V] Uexc [V]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
Fs Fs
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
75

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs
[]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
c% c%
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs75 []
Matricola Rapporto
S/N Matricule
Ratio Raport
[A/A] 100-200/5
Sec.
Prest.
120% In
100% In
20% In
5% In
1% In

1S1-1S2
Burden Prest.
25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100%
[crad]
%
0,13 -0,05
[crad]
0,10 0,05
[crad]
[crad]
[crad]
0408-02-07
100-200/5
2S1-2S2
-0,14 0,14 -0,06
0,05 0,13 0,08
100-200/5 0408-02-08 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,13 0,17 -0,08
0,06 0,12 0,09
100-200/5 0408-02-09 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,19 0,13 -0,04
0,07 0,10 0,06
100-200/5 0408-02-10 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,15 0,16 -0,07
0,08 0,13 0,08
100-200/5 0408-02-11 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,17 0,13 -0,05
0,03 0,13 0,09
100-200/5 0408-02-12 100-200/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,22
0,05
Emesso il
07/09/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
0408-03-06
Client Client
Item Position
S/N Matr.
to at
Tipo
AB13
Frequenza [Hz]
60
Ith 20 kA
/ 1s

CARATTERISTICHE

200-400
Frequency Frequence
15 / 0,2 Fs
CHARACTERISTICS
Rapporto [A/A]
/ 5 / 5
Ratio Rapport
Burden Prestation
Burden Prestation
Fs
Burden Prestation

50 kV x 60 s


3 kV x 60 s
Up [V] (1 x In) x 24 s


NOTES
NOTES
NOTE
Emesso il
17/07/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv

Cliente
VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008
Client Client
Tipo
AB13
Conferma 2012.15.0408
Posizione
03
Item Position
S/N Matr.
Frequenza [Hz]
Matr.
0408-03-01
to at
Ith
20 kA / 1 s
0408-03-06
CARATTERISTICHE
Type Type
Rapporto[A/A]
24 / 50 / 125
60

200-400
Frequency Frequence
15
Ratio Rapport
/ / /
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
Burden Prestation
5
/ / /
0,2
Fs Fs Fs
Prestazione [VA/Cl]
15
5P20
Prestazione [VA/Cl]

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs Rs
[] []
Uexc [V] Uexc [V]
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
Fs Fs
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
75

75
S/N Matr. S/N Matr.
Matr. Matr.
0408-03-01
MORSETTI 2S1-2S2
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs
[]
0,41
96
Iexc [A] Iexc [A]
0,31
c% c%
0,31
MORSETTI
TERMINAL BORNES
Rs75 []
Matricola Rapporto
S/N Matricule
Ratio Raport
[A/A] 200-400/5
Sec.
Prest.
120% In
100% In
20% In
5% In
1% In

1S1-1S2
Burden Prest.
25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100%
%
0,11 -0,06
[crad]
0,09 0,06
%
0,11 -0,08
[crad]
0,09 0,07
%
0,09 -0,15
[crad]
0,14 0,14
%
0,02 -0,27
[crad]
0,20 0,24
[crad]
0408-03-01
200-400/5
2S1-2S2
-0,10 0,09 -0,10
0,04 0,11 0,08
200-400/5 0408-03-02 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,12 0,10 -0,08
0,04 0,10 0,07
200-400/5 0408-03-03 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,15 0,10 -0,07
00,06 0,09 0,06
200-400/5 0408-03-04 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,12 0,14 -0,06
0,05 0,08 0,05
200-400/5 0408-03-05 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,10 0,11 -0,08
0,04 0,09 0,06
200-400/5 0408-03-06 200-400/5
1S1-1S2
2S1-2S2
-0,12
0,05
Emesso il
17/07/2012
Compilato
Corpuz Jackson
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv
VERBALE DI COLLAUDO TRASFORMATORI DI TENSIONE
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS TEST REPORT RAPPORT DE ESSAI TRANSFORMATEURS DE TENSION

Cliente Equipos Electroindustriales S.A. Conferma 2012.15.0175 Posizione 04 Matr. 0175-04-01
VC TV rev. 7 del 15.02.2010
0175-04-06
Client Client
Tipo FB11
Item Position
Frequenza [Hz] 60
S/N Matr.
Fatt. di tens.
to at
1,2 / Cont. & 1,9 / 8 h
CARACTERISTIQUES
CARATTERISTICHE
CHARACTERISTICS
Type Type
Rapporto [V/V]

24000 /3
Frequency Frequence
240/3 Prestazione [VA / Cl.] 30
Voltage factor Facteur de tension

/ 0,2
Ratio Rapport
/ / /
Burden Prestation
240/3 Prestazione [VA / Cl.] 50 / 3P
Burden Prestation
Prestazione [VA / Cl.] /
Burden Prestation

b) Prova di tenuta a frequenza industriale dell'avvolgimento primario (9.2.2.1)

3 kV x 60 s
ESSAIS GENERAUX - STANDARDS CEI EN 60044-2 IEC 60044-2
ROUTINE TESTS - STANDARDS CEI EN 60044-2 IEC 60044-2
* Prova di tenuta con sorgente separata (tensione applicata) (9.2.2.1 / Par a)
Separate source withstand voltage test Essais dilectriques avec separe source
* Prova di tenuta con tensione indotta 250 Hz / 200 Hz (9.2.2.1 / Par b)
50 kV x 24 s / 30 s
Induced voltage withstand test 250 Hz / 200 Hz Essais dilectriques avec tension induit 250 Hz / 200 Hz

* Tensione Presollecitazione / Prestress Voltage / Tension de prestress * Tensione Misura 1 / Measure Voltage / Tension de mesure * Tensione Misura 2 / Measure Voltage 2 / Tension de mesure 2 d) Prova di tenuta a frequenza industriale degli avvolgimenti secondari (9.3)
e) Determinazione degli errori (12.3 / 13.7.1)

NOTES
NOTES
NOTE
Emesso il
27/04/2012
Compilato
Luca Papalini
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv
VERBALE DI COLLAUDO TRASFORMATORI DI TENSIONE
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS TEST REPORT RAPPORT DE ESSAI TRANSFORMATEURS DE TENSION

Cliente Equipos Electroindustriales S.A. Conferma 2012.15.0175 Posizione 04 Matr. 0175-04-01
VC TV rev. 7 del 15.02.2010
0175-04-06
Client Client
Tipo FB11
Item Position
Frequenza [Hz]
S/N Matr.
60 Fatt. di tens.
to at
1,2 / Cont. & 1,9 / 8 h
CARACTERISTIQUES
CARATTERISTICHE
CHARACTERISTICS
Type Type
Rapporto [V/V]

24000/3 / 240/3
Frequency Frequence
Prestazione [VA/Cl] 30 /
Voltage factor Facteur de tension

0,2
Ratio Rapport
/ 240/3
Burden Prestation
Prestazione [VA/Cl] 50 / 3P
Burden Prestation
/ Prestazione [VA/Cl] /
Burden Prestation
VOLTAGE ERRORS AND PHASE DISPLACEMENT ERRORS MEASUREMENT MESURE DES ERREURS DU RAPPORT ET D'ANGLE
Matricola Rapporto
S/N Matricule
Ratio Raport
[V/V] 24000:v3 / 240:v3
Sec.
Prest.
190% Vn
120% Vn
100% Vn
80% Vn
2% Vn
sec. Side secondaire

1a-1n
Burden Prest.
25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100% 25% 100%
[crad]
%
0,14 -0,12
[crad]
0,08 0,10
%
0,14 -0,12 0,09 -0,37 0,16 -0,10 0,10 -0,38 0,10 -0,14 0,10 -0,37
[crad]
0,08 0,10 0,11 0,28 0,06 0,08 0,11 0,28 0,06 0,08 0,11 0,27
%
0,14 -0,12
[crad]
0,08 0,10
[crad]
0175-04-01 24000:v3 / 240:v3 24000:v3 / 240:v3 0175-04-02 24000:v3 / 240:v3 24000:v3 / 240:v3 2a-2n 2a-2n
0,05 -0,43
0,13 0,30
0,20 -0,30
0,03 0,22
1a-1n
1a-1n
0175-04-03 24000:v3 / 240:v3 2a-2n
I VALORI MISURATI RIENTRANO NEI LIMITI INDICATI NELLE TABELLE 11 - 12 DELLE CEI EN/IEC 60044-2
THE MEASURED VALUES ARE IN THE LIMITS INDICATED IN TABLE 11 - 12 OF CEI EN/IEC 60044-2 LES VALEURES MESURE SONT DANS LES LIMITS INDIQUE DANS LES TABLEAUX 11-12 DES CEI EN/IEC 60044-2
Emesso il
27/04/2012
Compilato
Luca Papalini
Approvato
Issual date Emis le
Compiled Compiled
Approved Approuv
V.- ESQUEMAS DIMENSIONALES Y ELECTRICOS
VI.- ANEXOS
MANUAL DE MONTAJE, PUESTA EN SERVICIO Y MANTENIMIENTO

1. GENERALIDADES
Las Celdas Modulares Compactas ELECIN han sido desarrolladas con la finalidad de disponer de un conjunto de equipos para distribucin y/o transformacin, cuando se requieran de dimensiones reducidas, ya sea para instalacin interior o exterior. Una de las caractersticas ms importantes de este tipo de celdas es que emplea aparatos convencionales como son fusibles y transformadores. los seccionadores de potencia, interruptores,
2. INTRODUCCION
Este manual contiene informacin bsica de la fabricacin, descripcin de los equipos, instalacin, operacin y mantenimiento para una correcta utilizacin de las celdas Compactas Modulares de 24kV, 20KA, 60Hz, suministrada por la compaa ELECIN S.A., para la empresa FUNDICION CHILCA S.A.
3. DESCRIPCION GENERAL DE LA SUBESTACIN

Las celdas son del tipo autosoportada, ejecucin para montaje interior, fabricada con plancha galvanizada de 2.0mm. , provista de refuerzos para garantizar su solidez as como de los aparatos incorporados; de las siguientes dimensiones: Celda de Llegada Ancho Profundidad Altura Celda de Toma de Tensin de Barras Ancho Profundidad Altura : 500 mm. : 1000 mm. : 1950 mm. : 750 mm. : 1000 mm. : 1950 mm.
Av. San Luis 1986 307, San Borja, Lima Per, Tf.(51-1)715-1169 Fax: 224-3571 Fbrica: Las Fraguas 167 Urb. El Naranjal-Independencia, Lima-Per Tf. (51-1)715-0952 Fax:523-3165 Oficina e-mail: elecin@infonegocio.net.pe fabrica e-mail: felmec@infonegocio.com.pe web:www.elecinperu.com
Celda de Salida 1,2,3,4,5,6 Ancho Profundidad Altura : 750 mm. : 1000 mm. : 1950 mm.
Las celdas posee puertas, cubierta lateral y frontal, techos en planchas de 2mm de espesor, adems tiene cubierta posterior, las celdas estn separadas entre s por plancha LAF de 1.5 mm de espesor. Todos los componentes de fierro son sometidos a un proceso de pintura electrosttica de alta proteccin corrosiva an bajo las condiciones ms exigentes, con acabado color: RAL 2004.
La celda de llegada tiene una puerta frontal para la inspeccin del interruptor en vacio MARCA SAREL, las maniobras de cierre y apertura del conjunto se realizan desde la parte frontal de la celda a puerta cerrada ya que cuentan con enclavamientos mecnicos por medio de llaves de bloqueo. As mismo esta celda cuenta con un tablero de control y proteccin el cual est equipado con pulsadores de mando para las maniobras del interruptor, para el sistema de proteccin se cuenta con un Rel de proteccin para fallas por Mnima y Mxima Tensin, Sobre Corriente y Cortocircuito de Fase. Tambin cuenta con un sistema de Medicin, mediante un medidor totalizador en la celda de llegada.
Las celdas de salida 1.6, cuentan con un interruptor y seccionador de barra. Las maniobra del seccionador son mediante palanca de acceso frontal.
Todos los componentes de fierro son sometidos a un proceso de pintura electrosttica de alta proteccin corrosiva an bajo las condiciones ms exigentes.
4. DESCRIPCIN DE LOS APARATOS

El equipamiento en su totalidad de la Subestacin se encuentra en el listado de aparatos N 100.12.212.
5. OPERACIN Y SISTEMA DE ENCLAVAMIENTOS

El equipamiento con Interruptor Sarel y Seccionador de Lnea a Tierra con el cul se encuentra equipada las celdas Compactas Modulares opera de la siguiente forma: CELDA DE LLEGADA 5.1. MANIOBRA DE CIERRE
Cerrar la puerta de la celda de Llegada, retirar la llave de bloqueo, insertar la otra llave en el mando de tierra del Seccionador de Linea, girar en sentido horario para abrir la tierra, insertar la palanca en el mando para cerrar el seccionador de Linea, retirar la palanca y cerrar el acceso a ella girando la llave y luego retirarla.
Con la otra llave que se encuentra en este bloque de llaves desbloquear el interruptor, luego presionar el botn verde del interruptor o utilizando los pulsadores de maniobras ubicado en la parte superior en el tablero. La posicin de cierre se visualiza en el interruptor con un icono de color rojo y en el tablero con el encendido de una lmpara de color roja lo cual nos indica que el interruptor est cerrado. Hasta ah se tiene ya energizada toda la subestacin, en esta posicin el bloque de llaves queda insertado en el interruptor ya que solo se podr retira cuando el interruptor este en posicin abierto. Esta operacin de bloqueo es como seguridad para prevenir una mala maniobra.
5.2. MANIOBRA DE APERTURA Para des energizar la subestacin se debe abrir primero el interruptor, para ello se debe presin el botn rojo del interruptor o utilizando los pulsadores de maniobras ubicado en la parte superior en el tablero. La posicin de apertura se puede visualizar en el interruptor con un icono de color verde y en el tablero con el encendido de una lmpara de color verde lo cual nos indica que el interruptor est abierto. Retirar el juego de llaves para bloquear el interruptor y evitar un cierre no deseado.
Con la llave de acceso al mando del Seccionador de Lnea, liberar el acceso para insertar la palanca de maniobra. Girar la palanca en sentido anti horario para abrir
el seccionador de lnea. En esta posicin el bloque de llaves no saldr del acceso. Ya que solo saldr la llave cuando el Seccionador de Lnea este cerrado. Con la llave de acceso al Seccionador de Tierra, liberar el acceso para insertar la palanca de maniobra, girar en sentido anti horario para cerrar el Seccionador de Tierra. En esta posicin se podr acceder al cubculo.
CELDA DE SALIDA 5.3. MANIOBRA DE CIERRE
Cerrar la puerta de la celda de Salida, insertar la palanca de maniobra en el mando del Seccionador de Tierra, girar en sentido horario, luego insertar la palanca en el mando para cerrar el Seccionador de Linea, retirar la palanca y cerrar el acceso a ella girando la llave y luego retirarla.
Con la otra llave que se encuentra en este bloque de llaves desbloquear el interruptor, luego presionar el botn verde del interruptor o utilizando los pulsadores de maniobras ubicado en la parte superior en el tablero. La posicin de cierre se visualiza en el interruptor con un icono de color rojo y en el tablero con el encendido de una lmpara de color roja lo cual nos indica que el interruptor est cerrado. Hasta ah se tiene ya energizada toda la subestacin, en esta posicin el bloque de llaves queda insertado en el interruptor ya que solo se podr retira cuando el interruptor este en posicin abierto. Esta operacin de bloqueo es como seguridad para prevenir una mala maniobra.
5.4. MANIOBRA DE APERTURA Para des energizar la subestacin se debe abrir primero el interruptor, para ello se debe presin el botn rojo del interruptor o utilizando los pulsadores de maniobras ubicado en la parte superior en el tablero. La posicin de apertura se puede visualizar en el interruptor con un icono de color verde y en el tablero con el encendido de una lmpara de color verde lo cual nos indica que el interruptor est abierto. Retirar el juego de llaves para bloquear el interruptor y evitar un cierre no deseado.
Con la llave de acceso al mando del Seccionador de Lnea, liberar el acceso para insertar la palanca de maniobra. Girar la palanca en sentido anti horario para abrir el seccionador de lnea. En esta posicin el bloque de llaves no saldr del acceso. Ya que solo saldr la llave cuando el Seccionador de Lnea este cerrado.
Con la llave de acceso al Seccionador de Tierra, liberar el acceso para insertar la palanca de maniobra, girar en sentido anti horario para cerrar el Seccionador de Tierra. En esta posicin se podr acceder al cubculo.
6. PROTECCIONES
La celda de llegada est equipada con un sistema de proteccin contra fallas por Mnima y Mxima Tensin, Sobre corriente y cortocircuitos de fase. Para ello se tiene instalado un Rel de proteccin contra estas fallas marca TRYTRONIC del tipo NA60 funcin 27, 59, 50/51, 50N/51N, 67 el cual realizara un disparo (TRIP) hacia el interruptor de potencia el cual abrir el sistema para proteger a los equipos, tambin el rel mostrara en pantalla el tipo de falla que se origino.
La celda de Salida est equipada con un sistema de proteccin contra fallas por Sobre corriente y cortocircuitos de fase. Para ello se tiene instalado un Rel de proteccin contra estas fallas marca TRYTRONIC del tipo NA011 funcin 50/51, 50N/51N, 67 el cual realizara un disparo (TRIP) hacia el interruptor de potencia el cual abrir el sistema para proteger a los equipos, tambin el rel mostrara en pantalla el tipo de falla que se origino.
ACCCION FRENTE A UNA FALLA Cuando ocurre una falla el rel mandara la orden de apertura al interruptor el cual abrir el circuito. Para reponer el servicio se debe realizar una inspeccin previa y rpida de la falla para poder reponer el servicio lo ms antes posible. 1.- Verificar el origen de la falla. 2.- Inspeccionar que los equipos no hayan sufrido daos. 3.- Verificar que la falla se haya eliminado, ya que de persistir el rel ordenara nuevamente la apertura. 4.- Resetear el rel de proteccin para ponerlo en modo de operacin nuevamente.
IMPORTANTE. Todo el sistema de control, maniobras y proteccin requieren un voltaje de 24 Vcc como alimentacin auxiliar para lo cual la subestacin est equipada con 2 bateras de 12 Vcc conectadas en serie y un cargador de bateras que como entrada requiere una alimentacin de 220 Vca este sistema en conjunto nos brinda el voltaje de control para el funcionamiento de la subestacin.
Las bateras deben trabajar en conjunto con el cargador de bateras, ya que si no es as las bateras tienen una autonoma de 8 horas, pasado ese tiempo se corre el riesgo de que las bateras se descarguen y disminuya la vida til de las mismas. Es por eso que la alimentacin de 220 Vca no debe ser interrumpido por ms de 8 horas para que el cargador este trabajando e impida que las bateras se descarguen.
7. ENTREGA EN FABRICA
Nuestros equipos son fabricados con diseos ptimos, utilizando materiales de la mejor calidad y siguiendo estrictamente las recomendaciones de las normas internacionales. Durante la fabricacin son sometidos a un exigente control de calidad y al trmino, de la misma, se realizan las pruebas de comprobacin en todas las unidades. Conjuntamente con la subestacin, nuestra empresa entrega protocolos de prueba y una carta de garanta de los equipos suministrados. Por razones de seguridad la Subestacin Compacta Modular se entrega separada del transformador de distribucin para facilitar el transporte y la maniobra en obra.
8. TRANSPORTE
Antes de proceder al transporte se verific que la Subestacin y todo su equipamiento estn en perfectas condiciones. (Cuando el transporte se realiza fuera de Lima, se requerir embalaje) Para el transporte se debe tener las siguientes precauciones: Asegurar que la Subestacin y el transformador no sufran desplazamientos sobre la plataforma.
Manipular con cuidado sobre todo cuando se trate de material frgil. Recomendar al transportista conservar velocidad baja, para evitar movimientos bruscos.
Observar las marcas de los bultos y respetar la posicin de transporte. Verificar que todas las vlvulas y respiraderos del transformador estn hermticamente cerrados.
9. RECEPCIN EN OBRA
Para la recepcin en obra el usuario deber considerar los siguientes aspectos: Revisar minuciosamente la Subestacin en su conjunto, comprobando que sta y todos sus componentes no hayan sufrido ningn tipo de dao en el transporte. Verificar que todos los accesorios de la Subestacin estn completos: barras de cobre, aisladores porta barras, ferretera, etc. Comprobar que los bultos hayan sido transportados segn las indicaciones y sealizaciones correspondientes. Verificar que los datos de placa de caractersticas de los diferentes equipos correspondan a la especificacin del proyecto. Verificar que no se haya producido prdidas de aceite en el transformador, adems que no presenten filtraciones; asimismo controlar el nivel de aceite.
Comprobar que todas las vlvulas y respiraderos hayan llegados hermticamente cerrados y as debern quedar si el transformador permanecern cerrados.
10. INSPECCIONES PRELIMINARES

Ante de realizar las pruebas de resistencia de aislamiento a los equipos de la Subestacin, cerciorarse si es que existe elementos que no deban ser sometidos a dichas pruebas tales como tarjetas electrnicas y/o elementos extraos que puedan influir en el resultado de las mediciones.
Revisar y proceder de acuerdo a las instrucciones indicadas en los manuales de servicio de cada equipo y/o aparato.
Medir el aislamiento fase-fase y fase-tierra. Los instrumentos de medicin o dispositivos de control que no estn especificados para este tipo de pruebas sern aislados y conectados a tierra.
Verificar el correcto funcionamiento mecnico de los equipos. Operar cada dispositivo magntico (si los hubiera), con la finalidad de observar que todo los elementos mviles operen libremente.
Verificar el ajuste de todos los rels, potencimetros y dems elementos de calibracin (si los hubiera), de tal manera que estn convenientemente regulados, tal como lo describen sus propios manuales de operacin y puesta en servicio.
Verificar si el cableado de control est correctamente conectado y de acuerdo a los planos suministrados.
Verificar la conexin de los circuitos de fuerza. Verificar los fusibles de control. (si los hubiera)
11. OPERACIN INICIAL Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO

Verificar que todos los equipos de corte y seccionamiento se encuentren en la posicin de reposo. Alimentar los circuitos de mando, control y servicios auxiliares, verificar el correcto funcionamiento de todas las seales. (si los hubiera) Efectuar maniobras con los equipos en posicin de prueba. Verificar el correcto funcionamiento de los dems equipos de medida y proteccin como ampermetros, medidores, rels de proteccin, etc. (si los hubiera) Verificar que la tensin y frecuencia de la red, as como la altitud y la temperatura ambiente concuerden con las caractersticas tcnicas de la S.E. y de los equipos.
Chequear que las conexiones entre los bornes de los aparatos y las barras colectoras estn bien ajustadas y apropiadamente dimensionadas. As tambin las conexiones a tierra.
Slo despus de realizar las verificaciones anteriores, se podr efectuar maniobras sin carga, verificando simultneamente el correcto funcionamiento de los diferentes equipos.
Dentro de la cajuela se encuentran borneras seccionables cortocrcuitables los cuales esta cortocircuitadas en el caso de seal de corriente. Los cuales antes de poner en servicio se deber quitar el puente.
12. INSTRUCCIONES DE MANTENIMIENTO

Remover el polvo y suciedad acumulados usando brochas, telas suaves y/o aspirador.
Limpiar todas las barras colectoras y de tierra. Inspeccionar las uniones de las barras colectoras y de tierra; ajustarlas si es necesario.
Retirar los dispositivos y alimentadores de tal forma de poder remover todo el polvo o suciedad que se pueda haber acumulado.
Verificar el correcto funcionamiento de los instrumentos como rels, contactos auxiliares, fusibles, etc., ms crticos y reemplazarlos de ser necesario.
Revise el estado de los conductores si no tienen hilos cortados o aislamiento o si la chaqueta est deteriorada.
Reemplace las etiquetas de identificacin si estas se encuentran ilegibles. No emplear solventes que puedan daar los equipos. No engrase ni aceite los equipos, a menos que lo indique el fabricante.
En todas las operaciones de mantenimiento emplear siempre las herramientas apropiadas y en buen estado para evitar esfuerzas no necesarios, que daen los equipos.
Realizar limpieza de aisladores cada 12 meses. Medir la resistencia de los pozos de tierra Rt < 5 Ohms cada 12 meses.
13. RECOMENDACIONES GENERALES

Para el buen funcionamiento de la Subestacin debe tenerse en cuenta la siguiente: El lugar de operacin debe estar libre de objetos extraos como cajones, escaleras, etc., que obstruyan las operaciones de maniobra.
El lugar de trabajo debe estar ventilado adecuadamente y no debe existir elementos combustibles en las proximidades.
Tomar las precauciones debidas a fin de evitar los aniegos de agua de limpieza, lluvias, etc., lleguen a sus proximidades poniendo en peligro al operador. (nunca opere un equipo elctrico en estas condiciones).
Deber contar con una apropiada toma de tierra para evitar descargas peligrosas. Las conexiones de entrada y salida debern estar perfectamente realizadas, con los terminales apropiados y el uso de pernos y arandelas de seguridad.
Nunca efectu servicio de mantenimiento a ningn equipo elctrico cuando ste se encuentre energizado.
Verifique que todas las conexiones estn debidamente ajustadas. Esto comprende barras, conductores slidos o cableados, etc.
No emplear aire comprimido para la limpieza, pues la presin puede daar algn mecanismo y partculas extraas pueden alojarse dentro de los mismos, impidiendo en algunos casos el correcto funcionamiento del mismo.
10
Nunca apoye escaleras contra la Subestacin, use bancos de madera robustos previstos de peldaos y/o escaleras auto soportadas, a fin de alcanzar las partes altas.
11
SYStem6
1236 kV
Medium voltage switchboard Quadro di media tensione Tableau de moyenne tension
SYStem6
1236 kV
Medium voltage switchboard Quadro di media tensione Tableau de moyenne tension
Generalities Employment Description Norms and homologations Electrical features Typical panels
Generalit Impiego Descrizione Norme e certificati Caratteristiche elettriche Pannelli tipici
Gnralits Emploi Description Normes et certificats Caractristiques lectriques Cellules typiques
Complementary tools Dimensional features, fixing and incoming cables
Accessori complementari Caratteristiche dimensionali, fissaggio e passaggio cavi
Outils additionnels Caractristiques dimensionnelles, fixage et passage de cbles
index
Pag.
02 03 04 07 10 11 17 18
Generalities Generalit Gnralits
SYStem6 MV switchboard is composed by a standardized, modular and compact series of protected and internally arc-proofed panels metal-enclosed type (LSC2A-PI), equipped with SF6 insulated on-load switches and vacuum circuit breakers. Complex switchboard configurations can be realized using modular panels. Each panel and circuit is equipped with necessary mechanical interlocks and visual mimic diagram to ensure maximum safety of the operator. Arc-proof execution allows to employ these panels even in extreme conditions.
Il quadro MT SYStem6 costituito da una serie normalizzata, modulare e compatta di scomparti tipo metalenclosed (LSC2A-PI) a prova darco interno, equipaggiati con interruttori di manovra-sezionatori in SF6, e con interruttori automatici sottovuoto. La modularit degli scomparti permette di realizzare quadri anche con configurazioni complesse. Ogni scomparto corredato di interblocchi meccanici e schema sinottico, che assicurano operazioni di manovra in condizioni di assoluta sicurezza. Lesecuzione a tenuta darco interno ne consente limpiego in condizioni di esercizio e sicurezza estreme.
Le tableau de MT SYStem6 est compos par une srie de cellules standards, modulaires et compactes, du type metal-enclosed (LSC2A-PI) tenue larc interne, quipes avec des interrupteurs en SF6 et disjoncteur sous vide. La modularit des cellules permet la ralisation mme des configurations complexes. Chaque cellule est quipe avec des verrouillages mcaniques et un schma synoptique qui assurent toute scurit de manuvre. La tenue larc interne permet demployer ces cellules mme en conditions extrmes.
02
Employment Impiego Emploi

SYStem6 switchboards are used in MV secondary power distribution. Particularly they can be employed for protection and control of electric lines, in transformer substations, in cogeneration plants, as well as for photovoltaic plants, etc.. I quadri SYStem6 trovano impiego nella distribuzione elettrica secondaria di MT. In particolare possono essere impiegati per la protezione e lalimentazione di linee elettriche, nelle cabine di trasformazione, in impianti di cogenerazione, oltre che per impianti fotovoltaici, ecc.. Les tableaux SYStem6 sont utiliss dans la distribution lectrique secondaire de MT. En particulier peuvent tre utiliss pour le contrle et la protection des lignes lectriques, dans les postes de transformation, dans les usines de cognration, ainsi que dans les installation photovoltaques, etc..
03
Description Descrizione Description

1 2
Auxiliary compartment Cassonetto ausiliario Coffret auxiliaire Bus bars compartment Vano sbarre Compartiment barres
3
On-load switch Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore Interrupteur
7
Vacuum circuit breaker Interruttore sottovuoto Disjoncteur sous vide
4
Current/Voltage transformers Trasformatori di corrente/tensione Transformateurs de courant/tension
6
Main equipments compartment Vano apparecchiature principali Compartiment quipements principaux
5
Earth switch Sezionatore di terra Interrupteur de mise la terre
04
Bus bars compartment Vano sbarre Compartiment barres

In the bus bars compartment are placed the three main bus bars of the system. This sector is completely isolated from the main equipment compartment, allowing a total safety access to this one, with main bus bars in tension too, according to the classification LSC2A. The main bus bars can work to 400-630-1250A. Nel vano sbarre trovano collocamento le sbarre principali del sistema. Questo vano completamente separato dal vano apparecchiature principali; ci permette laccesso a questultimo in totale sicurezza anche con le sbarre principali in tensione, secondo la classificazione LSC2A. Le sbarre principali possono avere la portata 400-630-1250A.
Dan les compartiment barres sont colloques les trois barres principales du systme. Ce compartiment barres est compltement spar du compartiment quipements principaux, cela permet laccs ce dernier en totale sret mme avec les barres principales en tension, selon la classification LSC2A. Les barres principales peuvent travailler 400-630-1250.
Auxiliary compartment Cassonetto ausiliario Coffret auxiliaire

This compartment is used to set the auxiliary command and control equipments, such as protection relay, control buttons, signaling lamps, terminal boards, etc.. Questo scomparto viene utilizzato per collocare le apparecchiature ausiliarie per il comando e controllo, come rel di protezione, pulsanti di comando, lampade di segnalazione, morsettiere di collegamento, ecc..
Ce compartiment est utilis pour placer les quipements auxiliaire pour la commande et le contrle comme le relai de protection, les boutons de commande, les lampes de signalisation, plaques bornes pour connexion, etc..
On-load switch Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore Interrupteur

The on-load switches IM6 type, with resin envelop, are filled with hexafluoride (SF6) as dielectric insulation and interruption. Its position creates a separation between the bus bars compartment and the main equipment compartment. The switch admits three different positions: closed, open and earthed; the lock system prevents any wrong positions. Gli interruttori di manovra-sezionatori della serie IM6, con involucro in resina, utilizzano lesafloruro (SF6) come dielettrico per lisolamento e linterruzione. La sua posizione allinterno dello scomparto crea una separazione tra il vano sbarre e il vano apparecchiature principali. L'apparecchio pu assumere tre posizioni: aperto, chiuso e messo a terra; un sistema di interblocco previene manovre errate.
Les interrupteurs srie IM6, avec enveloppe en rsine poxy, utilisent le gaz SF6 comme dilectrique pour lisolement et linterruption. Sa position lintrieur de la cellule cre une sparation entre le compartiment barres et le compartiment quipements principaux. Lappareillage peut avoir trois positions : ferm, ouvert et mise la terre ; un efficace systme de verrouillage prvient les fausses manuvres.
Current/Voltage transformers Trasformatori di corrente/tensione Transformateurs de courant/tension

They are provided with single primary winding and single or double secondary winding, depending on the required use. Characteristics in accordance with IEC 60044-1/2 Standards. Sono provvisti di singolo primario e singolo o doppio secondario, in funzione del tipo di impiego richiesto. Caratteristiche in accordo con le norme IEC 60044-1/2.
Ils sont pourvus de simples enroulement primaire et une ou deux enroulement secondaire, en fonction de lutilisation souhaite. Caractristiques conformment des normes IEC 60044-1/2.
05
Earth switch Sezionatore di terra Interrupteur de mise la terre

Il sezionatore di terra interbloccato meccanicamente con linterruttore di manovra-sezionatore. Garantisce la messa a terra del cavo in arrivo/partenza, permettendo laccesso allo scomparto apparecchiature principali in assoluta sicurezza. Les interrupteurs de mise a la terre est verrouill mcaniquement linterrupteurs. Il fournit la mise a la terre du cble entrant/sortant, permettant laccs au compartiment quipements principaux en toute scurit.
The earth switch is mechanically interlocked with the on-load switch. It ensures the earthing of incoming/ outgoing cable allowing the access to the main equipment compartment in complete safety.
Main equipments compartment Vano apparecchiature principali Compartiment quipements principaux

Allinterno del vano sono alloggiati: linterruttore automatico, i trasformatori di misura, il sezionatore di terra e altre apparecchiature principali, oltre che i cavi di media tensione per il collegamento delle apparecchiature esterne. Blocchi meccanici e blocchi a chiave garantiscono che laccesso al vano avvenga solo dopo aver completato le manovre necessarie alla messa in sicurezza. A lintrieur du compartiment se trouvent interrupteur automatique, les transformateurs de mesure, le sectionneur de terre et les autres quipements principaux, en plus que les cbles de moyenne tension pour la connexion des appareillages extrieures. Les verrouillages mcaniques et cl garantissent que laccs au compartiment se produit seulement aprs avoir termin les manuvres ncessaires pour les mesures de scurit.
Inside the compartment there are: the automatic switch, the instrument transformers, the earth switch and others equipments, as well as the medium voltage cables for external equipments connection. Mechanical and key locks ensure that access to the compartment occurs only after completing all necessary safety maneuvers.
Vacuum circuit breaker Interruttore sottovuoto Disjoncteur sous vide

Gli interruttori sottovuoto della serie WL sono realizzati tramite la tecnica di costruzione a poli separati. Allinterno di ogni polo si trova unampolla sottovuoto che, grazie ad un particolare processo produttivo, viene racchiusa allinterno della resina direttamente nella fase di stampaggio, migliorandone la tenuta dielettrica. Les disjoncteurs de moyenne tension sous vide sont raliss avec une technique de construction ples spars. A lintrieur de chaque pole se trouve une ampoule sous vide qui, grce un processus productif particulier, est incorpore dans la rsine directement dans la phase de moulage, amliorant la tenue dilectrique.
The medium voltage vacuum circuit breakers WL type are manufactured using the separate poles technique. Each pole contains a vacuum interrupter which, thanks to a special production process, is incorporated inside the resin during the moulding stage, improving the dielectric strength.
06
Norms and homologations Norme e certificati Normes et certificats
SYStem6 switchboards have positively passed all type tests at official laboratories (CESI), according to the International Standards IEC, as well as they have obtained the peculiar homologations in others countries. The quality system (ISO 9001 ISO 14000) assures that the whole production process maintains an high and steady quality level. During the whole cycle of production each equipment is submitted to electrical and mechanical tests until the final test, performed as required by the IEC Standards.
I quadri SYStem6 hanno positivamente superato, presso laboratori ufficiali (CESI), tutte le prove di tipo, in accordo alle Norme Internazionali IEC, oltre che aver ottenuto omologazioni specifiche di altri paesi. Il sistema di controllo qualit (ISO 9001 ISO 14000) assicura che lintero processo di produzione mantenga un livello qualitativamente alto e costante. Durante tutto il ciclo di produzione le apparecchiature sono sottoposte a prove meccaniche ed elettriche fino al collaudo finale, condotto secondo quanto previsto dalle Normative IEC.
Les tableaux SYStem6 ont positivement pass dans laboratoires officiels (CESI) non seulement tous les essais de type en accord aux Normes Internationales IEC, mais aussi ils ont obtenu les homologations spcifiques dautres pays. Le systme de contrle qualit (ISO 9001 ISO 14000) assure que tout le procs de production garde un niveau qualitativement haut et constant. Pendant tout le cycle de production les quipements sont soumis aux essais lectriques et mcaniques jusqu lessai final, ralis en conformit aux Normes IEC.
Standards
(IEC) CEI EN-62271-200 (IEC) CEI EN-62271-102 CEI EN-62271-103 CEI 0-16
Norme
Normes
07
Technical features Caratteristiche tecniche Caractristiques techniques
Due to continuous development of building materials and the updating of standards, reported data are not constricting and are subject to our revision.
Considerando levoluzione di materiali e norme, quanto riportato nel presente documento si potr ritenere impegnativo solo dopo nostra conferma.
Etant donn lvolution des matriels ainsi que des normes, les informations contenues dans le prsent document, ne seront considres comme tant valable quaprs confirmation de notre part.
Electrical features Caratteristiche elettriche Caractristiques lectriques
SYStem6 24kV switchboard Quadro SYStem6 24kV Tableau SYStem6 24kV
SYStem6
Rated voltage Tensione nominale Tension nominale Rated power-frequency withstand voltage 50Hz 1Min (kV r.m.s.) Tensione nominale di tenuta alla frequenza di esercizio 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.) Tension nominale la frquence industrielle 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak value) Tensione nominale di tenuta ad impulso atmosferico (valore di picco) Tension nominale de tenue au choc (valeur de crte) Rated frequency Frequenza nominale Frquence nominale Rated current main bus bars up to Corrente nominale sbarre principali fino a Courant nominale barres principales jusqu' Rated current unit Corrente nominale unit funzionali Courant nominale unit fonctionelles Short-time withstand current Corrente di breve durata ammissibile Courant de courte dure admissible Peak value Valore di picco Valeur de crte Withstand internal arc Tenuta a l'arco interno Tenue l'arc interne Protection degree indoor / outdoor Grado di protezione interno / esterno Degr de protection intrieur / extrieur Altitude Altitudine Hauteur Ambient temperature Temperatura ambiente Temprature ambiante To earth and between phases Verso massa e tra le fasi Vers la terre et entre les phases kV Across the isolating distance Sulla distanza di sezionamento Sur la distance de sectionnement To earth and between phases Verso massa e tra le fasi Vers la terre et entre les phases Across the isolating distance Sulla distanza di sezionamento Sur la distance de sectionnement 32 45 60 80 kV 12 17.5 24 36
28
38
50
70
75 kV 85
95
125
170
110
145
195
Hz
50-60
A 630 1000 16 - 1s 20 - 3s 25 - 1s 40 50 62.5
1000 400 630 1000 16 - 1s 20 -1s 20 - 2s 40 50
kA
kA
kA
16 - 1s
IP
2X/3X
1000
-540
10
Typical panels Pannelli tipici Cellules typiques
Dimensions | Dimensioni | Dimensions
kV
12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 l l l l l
-R
500
750
1100
AS RS
AS Arrive simple RS Remonte de barres
Equipement de base Jeu de barres Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Cbles pur remonte Accessories en option Indicateurs de tension
AS Incoming cable RS Bus riser

Basic equipment Bus bars Low voltage auxiliary compartment Cables for riser Optional accessories Voltage indicators
AS Arrivo semplice RS Risalita a sbarre

Unit di base Sistema di sbarre Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Cavi per risalita Accessori a richiesta Indicatori di presenza tensione
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 500 750 1100
l l
-R
AT
AT Arrivo con sezionatore di terra
Unit di base Sistema di sbarre Sezionatore di terra ST6 Indicatori di presenza tensione Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Accessori a richiesta Blocchi a chiave
AT Incoming with earth switch

Basic equipment Bus bars Earth switch ST6 Voltage indicators Low voltage auxiliary compartment Heater resistance with thermostat Optional accessories Key locks
AT Arrive avec sect. de mise la terre

Equipement de base Jeu de barres Sectionneur de mise a le terre ST6 Indicateurs de tension Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Rsistance de chauffage avec thermostat Accessories en option Verrouillages cl
11
I
-R
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 l l l l l 500 750 1100
I Incoming or outgoing
Basic equipment Bus bars On-load switch IM6 KS operating mechanism Earth switch Voltage indicators Low voltage auxiliary compartment Heater resistance with thermostat Optional accessories KP operating mechanism Tripping coil (KP operating mechanism) Motor operating mechanism KSM Auxiliary contacts Key locks
I Arrivo o Partenza
Unit di base Sistema di sbarre Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6 Comando KS Sezionatore di terra Indicatori di presenza tensione Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Accessori a richiesta Comando KP Sganciatore di apertura (comando KP) Comando motorizzato KSM Contatti ausiliari Blocchi a chiave
I Arrive ou dpart
Equipement de base Jeu de barres Interrupteur IM6 Commande KS Sectionneur de mise la terre Indicateurs de tension Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Rsistance de chauffage avec thermostat Accessories en option Commande KP Bobine douverture (commande KP) Commande KSM Contacts auxiliaires Verrouillages cl
TM
-R
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 l l l l l 500 750 1100
TM Feeder with on-load switch-fuse

Basic equipment Bus bars On-load switch-fuse IM6P-TF KP operating mechanism Tripping coil (KP operating mechanism) Automatic tripping device when fuse blow-up 3 striker fuses Earth switch at the top and at the bottom of the fuses Voltage indicators Low voltage auxiliary compartment Heater resistance with thermostat Optional accessories KS operating mechanism Auxiliary contacts Auxiliary contacts for fuse blow-up Key locks
TM Partenza protezione con sezionatore-fusibili combinato

Unit di base Sistema di sbarre Sezionatore-fusibili IM6P-TF Comando KP Bobina di apertura (comando KP) Dispositivo apertura per fusione fusibile 3 fusibili con percussore Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle dei fusibili Indicatori di presenza tensione Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Accessori a richiesta Comando KS Contatti ausiliari Contatto aux scattato fusibile Blocchi a chiave
TM Dpart protection par interrupteur-fusibles combin

Equipement de base Jeu de barres Interrupteur-fusible IM6P-TF Commande KP Bobine d'ouverture (commande KP) Dispositif d'ouverture fusion fusible 3 Fusibles percuteur Sectionneur de m.a.t. mont et val des fusible Indicateurs de tension Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Rsistance de chauffage avec thermostat Accessories en option Commande KS Contacts auxiliaires Auxiliaire contacts for fuse blow-up Verrouillages cl
12
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 500 750 l l l

I>
1100
ITD
ITD Dpart avec disjoncteur sous vide avec TC et relais autoaliment
Equipement de base Jeu de barres Interrupteur IM6-TD Commande KS Disjoncteur avec protection intgre et bobine d'ouverture 3 transformateurs de courant Sectionneur de m.a.t. mont et val du disjoncteur Indicateurs de tension Rsistance de chauffage avec thermostat Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Accessories en option Contacts auxiliaires Verrouillages cl Commande motorise pour disjoncteur
-R
ITD Feeder with vacuum circuit breaker with CT and self powered relay
Basic equipment Bus bars On-load switch IM6-TD KS operating mechanism Automatic circuit breaker with integrated protection and tripping coil 3 current transformers Earth switch at the top and the bottom of the circuit breaker Voltage indicators Heater resistance with thermostat Low voltage auxiliary compartment Optional accessories Auxiliary contacts Key locks Motor operating mechanism for automatic circuit breaker
ITD Partenza con interruttore sottovuoto con TA e rel autoalimentato

Equipaggiamento di base Sistema di sbarre Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6-TD Comando KS Interruttore automatico con protezione integrata e bobina d'apertura 3 riduttori di corrente Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle dell'interruttore automatico Indicatori di presenza tensione Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Accessori a richiesta Contatti ausiliari Blocchi a chiave Comando a motore per interruttore automatico Esecuzione conforme CEI 0-16
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 500 750 l l l l

-R
I>
1100
ITI
ITI Dpart avec disjoncteur sous vide avec TC et relais indirect
Equipement de base Jeu de barres Interrupteur IM6S-TD Commande KS Disjoncteur avec bobine d'ouverture Sectionneur de m.a.t. et a mont et val du disjoncteur Indicateurs de tension 3 transformateurs de courant Protection secondaire microprocesseur Rsistance de chauffage avec thermostat Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Accessories en option Contacts auxiliaires Verrouillages cl Commande motorise pour disjoncteur
ITI Feeder with vacuum circuit breaker with CT and indirect relay
Basic equipment Bus bars On-load switch IM6S-TD KS operating mechanism Automatic circuit breaker with tripping coil Earth switch at the top and the bottom of the circuit breaker Voltage indicators 3 current transformers Microprocessor secondary protection Heater resistance with thermostat Low voltage auxiliary compartment Optional accessories Auxiliary contacts Key locks Motor operating mechanism for automatic circuit breaker
ITI Partenza con interruttore sottovuoto con TA e rel indiretto

Equipaggiamento di base Sistema di sbarre Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6S-TD Comando KS Interruttore automatico con bobina d'apertura Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle dell'interruttore automatico Indicatori di presenza tensione 3 riduttori di corrente Protezione secondaria a microprocessore Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Accessori a richiesta Contatti ausiliari Blocchi a chiave Comando a motore per interruttore automatico Esecuzione conforme CEI 0-16
13
ITB
-R
I>
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 500 750 1100
ITB Reverse feeder with vacuum circuit breaker, CT and indirect relay
Basic equipment Bus bars On-load switch IM6SC-TD KS operating mechanism Automatic circuit breaker with tripping coil Earth switch at the top and the bottom of the circuit breaker Voltage indicators 3 current transformers Microprocessor secondary protection Heater resistance with thermostat Low voltage auxiliary compartment Optional accessories Auxiliary contacts Key locks Motor operating mechanism for automatic circuit breaker 3 voltage transformers
ITB Partenza rovesciata con interruttore sottovuoto, TA e rel indiretto

Unit di base Sistema di sbarre Interruttore di manovra sezionatore IM6SC-TD Comando KS Interruttore automatico con bobina d'apertura Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle Int. Indicatori di presenza tensione 3 riduttori di corrente Protezione secondaria a microprocessore Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Accessori a richiesta Contatti ausiliari Blocchi a chiave Comando a motore per interruttore automatico 3 riduttori di tensione Esecuzione conforme CEI 0-16
ITB Dpart revers avec disjoncteur sous vide, TC et relais indirect

Equipement de base Jeu de barres Interrupteur IM6SC-TD Commande KS Disjoncteur avec bobine d'ouverture Sect. de m.a.t. mont et val du disjoncteur Indicateurs de tension 3 transformateurs de courant Protection secondaire microprocesseur Rsistance de chauffage avec thermostat Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Accessories en option Contacts auxiliaires Verrouillages cl Commande motorise pour disjoncteur 3 transformateurs de tension
ITI2
-R
kV 12 17.5
I>
mm. 375 500 750 l l l l 1500
24 36
ITI2 Unit with double switch-disconnector with vacuum circuit breaker, CT and indirect relay
Basic equipment Bus bars On-load switch IM6S-2 KS operating mechanism Automatic circuit breaker with tripping coil Earth switch at the top and the bottom of the circuit breaker Voltage indicators 3 current transformers Microprocessor secondary protection Heater resistance with thermostat Low voltage auxiliary compartment Optional accessories Auxiliary contacts Key locks Motor operating mechanism for automatic circuit breaker 3 voltage transformers
ITI2 Unit doppio sezionamento con interruttore sottovuoto, TA e rel indiretto

Unit di base Sistema di sbarre Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6S-2 Comando KS Interruttore automatico con bobina d'apertura Sezionatore di m.a.t. a monte ed a valle dell'interruttore automatico Indicatori di presenza tensione 3 riduttori di corrente Protezione secondaria a microprocessore Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Accessori a richiesta Contatti ausiliari Blocchi a chiave Comando a motore per interruttore automatico 3 riduttori di tensione
ITI2 Unit double interrupteur avec disjoncteur sous vide, TC et relais indirect
Equipement de base Jeu de barres Interrupteur IM6S-2 Commande KS Disjoncteur avec bobine d'ouverture Sect. de m.a.t. mont et val du disjoncteur Indicateurs de tension 3 transformateurs de courant Protection secondaire microprocesseur Resistance de chauffage avec thermostat Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Accessories en option Contacts auxiliaires Verrouillages cl Commande motorise pour disjoncteur 3 transformateurs de tension
14
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 l l 500 l l l l

-R
750
1100
MV
MV Misure con TV
Equipaggiamento di base Sistema di sbarre Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6S-F Comando K S 3 portafusibili completi di fusibili lato MT 3 riduttori di tensione Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Accessori a richiesta Contatti ausiliari Morsettiera sigillabile tipo MC3
MV Metering with VT
Basic equipment Bus bars On-load switch IM6S-F KS operating mechanism 3 fuse bases with fuses MV side 3 voltage transformers Heater resistance with thermostat Low voltage auxiliary compartment Optional accessories Auxiliary contacts Terminal set for seal
MV Mesure avec TC
Equipement de base Jeu de barres Interrupteur IM6S-TF Commande KS 3 socle porte fusibles avec fusibles MT 3 transformateurs de tension Resistance de chauffage avec thermostat Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Accessories en option Contacts auxiliaires Borne d'essai
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 500 750 l l l l

-R
1100
MA
MA Misure con TA e TV
Equipaggiamento di base Sistema di sbarre 3 riduttori di tensione 3 riduttori di corrente Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Accessori a richiesta Morsettiera sigillabile tipo MC3
MA Metering with CT and VT

Basic equipment Bus bars 3 voltage transformers 3 current transformers Heater resistance with thermostat Low voltage auxiliary compartment Optional accessories Terminal set for seal
MA Mesure avec TC e TT
Equipement de base Jeu de barres 3 transformateurs de tension 3 transformateurs de courant Resistance de chauffage avec thermostat Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Accessories en option Borne d'essai
15
MAS
-R
kV 12 17.5 24 36
mm. 375 500 750 l l l 1100
MAS Metering with CT, VT and switch

Basic equipment Bus bars On-load switch IM6S-TF KS operating mechanism 3 fuse bases with fuses MV side 3 voltage transformers 3 current transformers Heater resistance with thermostat Low voltage auxiliary compartment Optional accessories Auxiliary contacts Terminal set for seal
MAS Misure con TA, TV e sezionatore

Unit di base Sistema di sbarre Interruttore di manovra-sezionatore IM6S-TF Comando KS 3 portafusibili completi di fusibili lato MT 3 riduttori di tensione 3 riduttori di corrente Resistenza anticondensa con termostato Cassonetto circuiti ausiliari Accessori a richiesta Contatti ausiliari Morsettiera sigillabile tipo MC3
MAS Mesure avec TC, TT et interrupteur

Equipement de base Jeu de barres Interrupteur IM6S-TF Commande KS 3 socle porte fusibles avec fusibles MT 3 transformateurs de tension 3 transformateurs de courant Rsistance de chauffage avec thermostat Coffret pour circuit auxiliaires Accessories en option Contacts auxiliaires Borne d'essai
SYStem6 36kV switchboard Quadro SYStem6 36kV Tableau SYStem6 36kV
16
Complementary tools Accessori complementari Outils additionnels
Auxiliary compartment for above incoming cables Cassonetto arrivo cavi dallalto Compartiment pour arrive des cbles du haut
Baseboard for compartments alignments or incoming cables way Zoccolo per allineamento scomparti o impiegato come cunicolo cavi Socle pour l'alignement des compartiments ou utiliss comme un tunnel de cbles
1600
300
350
17
Dimensional features, fixing and incoming cables Caratteristiche dimensionali, fissaggio e passaggio cavi Caractristiques dimensionnelles, fixage et passage de cbles
12-17,5-24 kV
100 B E = 113, 206, 320 66 50 A D
B
s.r.l. LODI - Italy
1600
HD4
210 A 300 *

kV mm A 375 12 500 750 375 17,5 500 750 900 190 900 190 B C D 187,5 250 300 187,5 250 300 900 1000 190 290 187,5 250 300
700 *
* 113
* Recommended indicative values * Valori indicativi consigliati * Valeurs indicatives recommandes
250 375 24 500 750
Panel weight | Pesi dei pannelli | Poids de cellule

Type AR-RS AT I TM ITD ITI ITB ITI2 MV MA MAS 190 210 287 350 440 190 210 287 350 440 220 297 360 148 160 280 355 148 160 280 355 150 166 12 kV 375mm 100 500mm 750mm 375mm 100 17,5 kV 500mm 750mm 375mm 100 24 kV 500mm 126 151 170 188 296 378 480 450 750mm
18
The weights are indicated in kg | I pesi sono espressi in kg | Les poids sont indiqus en kg
230
230
36 kV
100 1400 B = 113, 206, 320
A 30
s.r.l. LODI - Italy
420
2250
HD4
1400 240 400* A 900* 250*
350
350
350
350
* Recommended indicative values * Valori indicativi consigliati * Valeurs indicatives recommandes

kV mm A 750 36 1100 1500
Panel weight | Pesi dei pannelli | Poids de cellule

Type AR-RS AT I TM ITI ITI2 MV MA 270 475 36kV 750mm 225 240 305 320 605 910 1100mm 1500mm
The weights are indicated in kg I pesi sono espressi in kg Les poids sont indiqus en kg
19
For energizing the world
Via del Commercio, 12/14 26900, Lodi (LO), Italy
Tel. +39 0371 49061 Fax +39 0371 411422
info@sarel.it www.sarel.it
Carlo Mameli Industrial Video Production
SYStem6 1236kV
rev. 06/2012
WL
1236 kV
Medium voltage vacuum circuit breaker Interruttore di media tensione in vuoto Disjoncteur de moyenne tension sous vide
WL
1236kV
Medium voltage vacuum circuit breaker Interruttore di media tensione in vuoto Disjoncteur de moyenne tension sous vide
Generalities Employment Description Accessories Norms and homologations Electrical features Dimensional drawings Electric circuit diagrams
Generalit Impiego Descrizione Accessori Norme e certificati Caratteristiche elettriche Disegni di ingombro Schemi elettrici circuitali
Gnralits Emploi Description Accessoires Normes et certificats Caractristiques lectriques Schmas dimensionnels Schmas lectriques des circuits
index
Pag.
02 03 04 05 08 10 11 19
Generalities Generalit Gnralits

The WL series of medium voltage vacuum circuit-breakers for indoor installation are realized using the separate pole technique. Each pole has a vacuum interrupter inside which, thanks to a special production process, is built in the resin directly during the cylinder molding stage. This construction technique ensure protection of the vacuum interrupter against impact, dust and condensation. The operating mechanism is stored energy type and free unlock system, with opening and closing operations independent from the operator. Remote control is possible thanks to special electrical accessories (geared motor, shunt opening release, etc.) The operating mechanism, the three poles and the current sensors (if provided) are mounted on a metallic frame without wheels. The device is particularly compact, sturdy and with very low weight. This circuit-breakers are sealed for life pressure systems (IEC 62271-100 and CEI 71-1 Norms). Gli interruttori di media tensione sottovuoto per interno serie WL sono realizzati tramite la tecnica di costruzione a poli separati. Allinterno di ogni polo si trova unampolla sottovuoto che, grazie ad un particolare processo produttivo, viene racchiusa allinterno della resina direttamente nella fase di stampaggio del cilindro. Questa tecnica di costruzione assicura la protezione dellampolla sottovuoto da urti, polvere e condensazione. Il comando ad accumulo di energia, a sgancio libero, con chiusura e apertura indipendenti dallazione delloperatore. Tramite lapplicazione di appositi accessori elettrici (motoriduttore, sganciatore di apertura e di chiusura) vi la possibilit di comandare a distanza linterruttore. Il comando, i tre poli e i sensori di corrente (se previsti) sono montati su un telaio metallico senza ruote. Il dispositivo risulta particolarmente compatto, robusto e di peso ridotto. Questi interruttori sono sistemi a pressione sigillata per la vita operativa (Norme IEC 62271-100 e CEI 71-1). Les disjoncteurs de moyenne tension sous vide pour intrieur srie WL sont raliss avec une technique de construction ples spars. Chaque ple possde lintrieur une ampoule sous vide qui, grce un processus productif particulier, est incorpore dans la rsine directement au cours de la phase de moulage du cylindre. Cette technique de construction assure la protection de lampoule sous vide contre les chocs, la poussire et les phnomnes de condensation. La commande est accumulation dnergie, dclenchement libre, et permet les manuvres douverture et de fermeture indpendamment de laction de loprateur. Par le biais de lapplication de diffrents accessoires lectriques (moto rducteur, dclencheur douverture et de fermeture), il est possible de commander le disjoncteur distance. La commande, les trois ples et les capteurs de courant (si prvus) sont monts sur un chssis mtallique sans roues. La construction est particulirement compacte, robuste, avec des poids rduits. Les disjoncteurs sont des systmes pression scelle pour toute la vie oprationnelle (Normes IEC 6227-100 et CEI 71-1).
02
Employment Impiego Emploi

The WL series circuit-breakers are used in all applications for medium voltage secondary distribution and in MV/LV transformers substation in factories, workshop in the industrial sector in general, and in the service sector. With the optional addition of the selfsupplied microprocessor-based over current release, WL circuit-breakers are suitable for use in unmanned MV/LV transformer substation and without auxiliary power supply. Gli interruttori serie WL vengono impiegati in tutte le applicazioni della distribuzione secondaria di media tensione e nelle cabine di trasformazione MT/BT di stabilimenti, officine del settore industriale in genere e del terziario. Con lapplicazione opzionale dello sganciatore di massima corrente a microprocessore autoalimentato, gli interruttori della serie WL sono abilitati allimpiego in cabine di trasformazione MT/BT non presidiate, e prive di alimentazione ausiliaria. Les disjoncteurs srie WL sont utiliss dans toutes les applications de la distribution secondaire de moyenne tension, et dans les cabines de transformation MT/BT des usines, ateliers du secteur industriel en gnral, et du secteur tertiaire. Avec lapplication facultative du dclencheur de courant maximal microprocesseur, autoaliment, les disjoncteurs de la srie WL sont convenables pour une utilisation dans les cabines de transformation MT/BT sans oprateur et qui nont pas dalimentation auxiliaire.
03
Description Descrizione Description

Opening button Pulsante di apertura Bouton douverture
Upper medium voltage terminals Terminali di media tensione superiori Bornes de moyenne tension suprieures
Lower medium voltage terminals Terminali di media tensione inferiori Bornes de moyenne tension infrieures Closing button Pulsante di chiusura Bouton de fermeture
Springs charging lever Leva carica molle Levier charge ressorts
Feature plate of circuit breaker Targa caratteristiche dellinterruttore Plaque caractristique du interrupteur Operation counter Contamanovre Compteur de manuvres
Mechanical signaling device for circuit breaker status (open/close) Segnalatore meccanico stato interruttore (aperto/chiuso) Indicateur mcanique status disjoncteur (ouvert/ferm)
Key lock Blocco a chiave Verouillages cl
Mechanical signaling device for springs status (charged/discharged) Segnalatore meccanico stato molle (cariche/scariche) Indicateur mcanique status ressorts ( chargs/dchargs)
04
Accessories Accessori Accessoires

Shunt opening release Sganciatore di apertura Dclencheur d'ouverture
Features | Caratteristiche | Caractristiques
Un Un Operating limits Limiti di funzionamento Limites de fonctionnement Power consumption Potenza assorbita Puissance absorbe Opening time Tempo di apertura Temps d'ouverture Minimum pulse duration Durata minima impulso Dure minimale impulsion 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V -24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V 70 110% Un 50/60 Hz
120W dc - 120VA ac
40ms
100ms
Shunt closing release Sganciatore di chiusura Dclencheur de fermeture

Un Un Operating limits Limiti di funzionamento Limites de fonctionnement Power consumption Potenza assorbita Puissance absorbe Closing time Tempo di chiusura Temps de fermeture Minimum pulse duration Durata minima impulso Dure minimale impulsion 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V -24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V 85 110% Un 50/60 Hz
120W dc - 120VA ac
55ms
100ms
05
Undervoltage release Sganciatore di minima tensione Dclencheur de minimum tension

Un Un Operating limits Limiti di funzionamento Limites de fonctionnement Inrush power Potenza allo spunto Puissance d'appel Inrush time Durata dello spunto Dure de l'appel Holding power Potenza di mantenimento Puissance de maintien Opening time Tempo di apertura Temps d'ouverture 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V -24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V 35 70% Un 50/60 Hz
opening | apertura | ouverture closing | chiusura | fermeture
85 110% Un
125W dc - 125VA ac
0,5s
5W dc - 5VA ac
40ms
Spring charging motor Motore carica molle Moteur charge ressorts

Un Un Operating limits Limiti di funzionamento Limites de fonctionnement Inrush power Potenza allo spunto Puissance d'appel Inrush time Durata dello spunto Dure de l'appel Rated power Potenza nominale Puissance nominale Charging time Tempo di carica Temps de charge 24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V -24 - 48 - 110 - 220 V 50/60 Hz
85 110% Un
100W dc - 100VA ac
0,3s
70W dc - 70VA ac
4 5s
06
Protection relay Rel di protezione Relais de protection

Threshold Soglia Seuil Features Caratteristiche Caractristiques Current regulation Regolazione corrente Rgulation courant Timing Temporizzazione Timing Notes Note Note
51
Normal Inverse1 (IEC "A") Normal Inverse2 Very Inverse (IEC B) Extremely Inverse (IEC C) Long Time Inverse Define Time
20 200% In
in step di 1%
0,01 1,00s
in step di 0,01s
50
Define Time
100 3000% In
in step di 100%
Instantaneous Istantaneo Instantan < 60ms Minimum 20% In on a phase or 10% In on two phases Minimo 20% In su una fase oppure 10% In su due fasi Minimum 20% In sur une phase ou 10% In sur deux phases
51N
Normal Inverse1 (IEC "A") Normal Inverse2 Very Inverse (IEC B) Extremely Inverse (IEC C) Long Time Inverse Define Time
10 80% In
in step di 1%
0,01 1,00s
in step di 0,01s
50N
Define Time
100 1200% In
in step di 100%
Instantaneous Istantaneo Instantan < 60ms
Current trasformer for protection relay TA per rel di protezione Transformateurs de courant pour relais de protection
They provide to the relay the current signal to be elaborated, furthermore they provide the necessary energy to power the relay and the shunt opening release. They can have a primary current of 40A, 80A or 250A. Forniscono al rel il segnale di corrente da elaborare, inoltre forniscono lenergia necessaria per lalimentazione del rel stesso nonch dello sganciatore di apertura. Possono avere correnti primarie di 40A, 80A oppure 250A. Ils fournissent au relais le signal de courant labor, ils fournissent en plus lnergie ncessaire pour alimenter soit le relais mme soit le dclencheur douverture. Ils peuvent avoir une courant primaire de 40A, 80A ou 250A.
07
Norms and homologations Norme e certificati Normes et certificats
The WL circuit-breakers comply with the IEC 62271-100, CEI EN 62271-100, CENELEC HD 348 S6, as well as those of the major industrialized countries. They have undergone the tests below, and ensure service safety and reliability of the equipment in all installations.
Gli interruttori WL sono conformi alle norme IEC 62271-100, CEI EN 62271100, CENELEC HD 348 S6, e a quelle dei principali paesi industriali. Ogni interruttore viene sottoposto alle prove sotto riportate, e garantisce la sicurezza e laffidabilit dellapparecchiatura in servizio in ogni impianto.
Les disjoncteurs WL sont conformes aux normes IEC 62271-100, CEI EN 62271-100, CENELEC HD 348 S6, et aux normes des principaux pays industriels. Ils ont t soumis aux essais indiqus ci-aprs, et garantissent la scurit et la fiabilit de lappareillage en service dans toutes les installations.
Type tests
Heating, withstand insulation at industrial frequency and atmospheric impulse, short-time and peak withstand current, mechanical life, making and breaking capacity of short circuit currents.
Prove di tipo
Riscaldamento, tenuta allisolamento e frequenza industriale e impulso atmosferico, tenuta alla corrente di breve durata e di picco, durata meccanica, potere di stabilimento e di interruzione delle correnti di corto circuito.
Essais de type
Rchauffement, tenue lisolement frquence industrielle et sous choc atmosphrique, tenue au courant de courte dure et de crte, endurance mcanique, pouvoir de fermeture et de coupure des courants de courtcircuit.
Individual tests
Insulation with voltage at industrial frequency in the main circuits, insulation of the auxiliary and control circuits, measurement of the main circuit resistance and mechanical and electrical operation.
Prove individuali
Isolamento con tensione a frequenza industriale dei circuiti principali, isolamento dei circuiti ausiliari e di comando, misure della resistenza dei circuiti principali, funzionamento meccanico ed elettrico.
Essais individuels
08
Isolement avec la tension frquence industrielle des circuits principaux, isolement des circuits auxiliaires et des circuits de commande, mesure de la rsistance des circuits principaux, fonctionnement mcanique et lectrique.
Technical features Caratteristiche tecniche Caractristiques techniques
Due to continuous development of building materials and the updating of standards, reported data are not constricting and are subject to our revision.
Considerando levoluzione di materiali e norme, quanto riportato nel presente documento si potr ritenere impegnativo solo dopo nostra conferma.
Etant donn lvolution des matriels ainsi que des normes, les informations contenues dans le prsent document, ne seront considres comme tant valable quaprs confirmation de notre part.
Electrical features Caratteristiche elettriche Caractristiques lectriques
WL 24kV medium voltage vacuum circuit breaker Interruttore di media tensione in vuoto WL 24kV Disjoncteur de moyenne tension sous vide WL 24kV
WL
Rated voltage Tensione nominale Tension nominale Rated power-frequency withstand voltage 50Hz 1Min (kV r.m.s.) Tensione nominale di tenuta alla frequenza di esercizio 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.) Tension nominale la frquence industrielle 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.) Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak value) Tensione nominale di tenuta ad impulso atmosferico (valore di picco) Tension nominale de tenue au choc (valeur de crte) Rated current Corrente nominale Courant nominale Short-time withstand current Corrente di breve durata ammissibile Courant de courte dure admissible Peak value Valore di picco Valeur de crte Rated short circuit making current Potere di chiusura nominale Pouvoir de fermeture nominale Rated short circuit breaking current Potere di interruzione nominale Pouvoir de coupure nominale Cables-charging breaking current Cavi a vuoto Cbles vide Single capacitor bank breaking current Batteria singola di condensatori Batterie singulire de condensateurs Back-to-Back capacitor bank breaking current Batteria multipla di condensatori Batterie multiple de condensateurs Operating sequence Sequenza operazioni Squence des oprations Altitude Altitudine Hauteur Ambient temperature Temperatura ambiente Temprature ambiante A A 400 To earth and between phases Verso massa e tra le fasi Vers la terre et entre les phases kV Across the isolating distance Sulla distanza di sezionamento Sur la distance de sectionnement To earth and between phases Verso massa e tra le fasi Vers la terre et entre les phases Across the isolating distance Sulla distanza di sezionamento Sur la distance de sectionnement 32 60 80 kV 12 24 36
28
50
70
75 kV 85
125
170
145
195
630 1250 16 - 3s 20 - 3s 40 50 40 50 16 20
630
kA - s
20-3s
kA
50
kA
50
20
31.5
Breaking capacity Potere di interruzione Pouvoir de coupure
400
0-0,3s-CO-3min-CO
1000
-540
10
Dimensional drawings Disegni di ingombro Schmas dimensionnels
WL 12kV
334,5 184,5 150 210 210 28 28
N4 M8
377
N2 M10 125
3,5
130,3
183,7 314
47
912,5
183,7 108
323,5
571,5
17,5
190
15
N4
6,8
293,5
15
99
80
505,5
149
605
20
11
WL 24kV
Right side
Lato destro
Ct droit
414,5 184,5 230 230 230 42
42
N4 M8
562
20 605 N2 M10
3,5
125
130,3
183,7 314
47
1032,5
183,7 113
325
690
17,5 312 15
163
N4
6,8
338,5
15
109
84
12
690,5
Right side with built in current transformers
Lato destro con TA accorpati
Ct droit avec transformateurs de courant intgrs
414,5 184,5 230 230 230 42
42
N4 M8
562
20 605 N2 M10
3,5
125
130,3
183,7 314
47
1032,5
183,7 113
325
690
17,5 312 15
163
N4
6,8
338,5
15
52,5
109 158,5
84
690,5
13
WL 24kV
Left side
Lato sinistro
Ct gauche
42 42 N4 M8 230 230 230
414,5 184,5
605
N2 M10
183,7 314
130,3
3,5
125
562
20
1032,5
47
183,7 113
17,5 312
690
325
690,5
338,5
15
163
15
N4
6,8
84
109
14
Left side with built in current transformers
Lato sinistro con TA accorpati
Ct gauche avec transformateurs de courant intgrs
42 42 N4 M8 230 230
414,5 230 184,5
20 562 605 N2 M10 183,7 314 130,3 3,5 125
1032,5
47
183,7 113
17,5 312
690
325
690,5
338,5
15
163
15
N4
6,8
84
109 158,5
52,5
15
WL 24kV
Frontal
Frontale
Frontal
42
78
230
230
78
42 238 N4 M8 120
20 742 42 80 358 9,5 53,1 390 28 616 626 85 27 73 200 N4 10,2 9,9 16,5 583 16,5 167,2 344 104,8 2 448,5 387,5
N2 M10
16
312
WL 36kV
534,5 184,5 350 350 350 42
701,9
20 605 N2 M10 3,5 125 130,3 183,7 314 183,7 113 47 1415,5 358 1040 17,5 342,9 163 N4 6,8 15 448,5 109 84
42 N4 M8
17
830,5
15
WL/t 12kV
Special reverse configuration
Configurazione speciale rovesciata
Configuration spciale renvers
47
912,5
5 3,5 125
377
20
N2 M10
184,5 334,5
150 210 210 28
146,7
130,3
277
28
N4 M8 334,5 420 158
99
80
15
293,5
425 190 N4 9 15 108 130,3
18
505,5
149
Electric circuit diagrams Schemi elettrici circuitali Schmas lectriques des circuits
Electric circuit description

Fig. 1 Spring charging motor (see note B) Fig. 2A Shunt closing release, ac power Fig. 2B Shunt closing release, dc power Fig. 3 Undervoltage release Fig. 4A Shunt opening release, ac power (see note A) Fig. 4B Shunt opening release, dc power (see note A) Fig. 5 Shunt opening release for self-powered relay Fig. 6 Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Fig. 7 Self-powered relay insertion, 2 resin CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT Fig. 8A Self-powered relay insertion, 3 phase toroidal CT Fig. 8B Self-powered relay insertion, 3 phase toroidal CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT Fig. 8C Self-powered relay insertion, 2 phase toroidal CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT
Descrizione circuiti elettrici

Fig. 1 Motore carica molle (vedi nota B) Fig. 2A Sganciatore di chiusura, alimentazione ca Fig. 2B Sganciatore di chiusura, alimentazione cc Fig. 3 Sganciatore di minima tensione Fig. 4A Sganciatore di apertura, alimentazione ca (vedi nota A) Fig. 4B Sganciatore di apertura, alimentazione cc (vedi nota A) Fig. 5 Sganciatore di apertura per rel autoalimentato Fig. 6 Contatti ausiliari disponibili dellinterruttore Fig. 7 Inserzione rel autoalimentato, 2 TA in resina e 1 toroide omopolare Fig. 8A Inserzione rel autoalimentato, 3 toroidi di fase Fig. 8B Inserzione rel autoalimentato, 3 toroidi di fase e 1 toroide omopolare Fig. 8C Inserzione rel autoalimentato, 2 toroidi di fase e 1 toroide omopolare
Description circuits electriques

Fig. 1 Moteur charge ressorts (voir note B) Fig. 2A Dclencheur de fermeture, alimentation ca Fig. 2B Dclencheur de fermeture, alimentation cc Fig. 3 Dclencheur de minimum tension Fig. 4A Dclencheur douverture, alimentation ca (voir note B) Fig. 4B Dclencheur douverture, alimentation cc (voir note B) Fig. 5 Dclencheur douverture pour relais autoaliment Fig. 6 Contacts auxiliaires disponibles du disjoncteur Fig. 7 Insertion relais autoaliment, 2 TC en rsine et 1 tore homopolaire Fig. 8A Insertion relais autoaliment, 3 tores de phase Fig. 8B Insertion relais autoaliment, 2 tores de phase et 1 tore homopolaire Fig. 8C Insertion relais autoaliment, 2 tores de phase et 1 tore homopolaire
Note
(A) The circuit for the supervision of shunt opening release must be used only and exclusively for that function. (B) Check the power supply available on the auxiliary circuit to verify if it is adequate to start several closing spring charging motors simultaneously. In order to prevent excessive absorption the closing springs must be charged manually before energizing the auxiliary circuit, or enter individually the circuit breakers and the relative auxiliary circuits.
Note
(A) Il circuito per il controllo della continuit dellavvolgimento dello sganciatore di apertura deve essere utilizzato solo ed esclusivamente per tale funzione. (B) Controllare la potenza disponibile sul circuito ausiliario per verificare la possibilit dellinserimento contemporaneo di pi motori carica molle. Per evitare assorbimenti eccessivi necessario caricare manualmente le molle prima di alimentare i circuiti ausiliari, oppure inserire singolarmente gli interruttori e i relativi circuiti ausiliari.
Note
(A) Le circuit pour le rglage de la continuit de lenroulement de dclencheur douverture doit tre utilis exclusivement pour cette fonction. (B) Contrlerla puissance disponible surle circuit auxiliairepour vrifierla possibilit d'insrerplus des moteurs charge ressort contemporainement. Pour viter l'absorption excessive est ncessaire charger manuellement les ressorts avant d'alimenter les circuits auxiliaires, ou placer sparment chacun disjoncteur et les relatifs circuits auxiliaires.
Legend
-XC -FCM -M -MC -MU -M01 -MA -XA -FCS -XU Customers terminal blocks Limit switch of the spring charging motor Spring charging motor Shunt closing release Undervoltage release Shunt opening release Self-powered shunt opening release Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts Signalling contacts springs charged/discharged Signalling contact undervoltage release energized/de-energized
Legenda
-XC -FCM -M -MC -MU -M01 -MA -XA -FCS -XU Morsettiera cliente Contatto di fine corsa motore carica molle di chiusura Motore carica molle Sganciatore di chiusura Sganciatore di minima tensione Sganciatore di apertura Sganciatore di apertura autoalimentato Contatti ausiliari dellinterruttore Contatti di fine corsa indicazione molle cariche/scariche Contatto segnalazione bobina di minima tensione eccitata/diseccitata
Legende
-XC -FCM -M -MC -MU -M01 -MA -XA -FCS -XU Borne de client Contact de fin de course moteur charge ressorts de fermeture Moteur charge ressorts Dclencheur de fermeture Dclencheur de minimum tension Dclencheur d'ouverture Dclencheur d'ouverture autoaliment Auxiliaires contacts du disjoncteur Contacts de fin de course indication ressorts chargs/dchargs Contact de signalisation dclencheur de minimum tension exits/dsexcits
19
Represented working conditions

The diagrams are represented in the following conditions : Auxiliary circuits not powered Circuit breaker in open position Undervoltage release activate Shunt opening/closing release not tripped Closing spring discharged
Condizioni di funzionamento rappresentate

Gli schemi sono rappresentati nelle seguenti condizioni : Circuiti ausiliari non alimentati Interruttore aperto Sganciatore di minima tensione attivo Sganciatori di apertura/chiusura non intervenuti Molle di chiusura scariche
Conditions dexploitation representee

Les schmas sont reprsente dans les suivantes condition : Circuits auxiliaires non aliments Disjoncteur ouvert Dclencheur de minimum tension activ Dclencheur douverture/fermeture non intervenues Ressorts de fermeture dechargs
Symbol Segno Symbole
Description Descrizione Description Terminal block Morsetto Bornes Connection of conductors Connessione di conduttori Raccordement des conducteurs
Description Descrizione Description Spring charge motor Motore caricamolle Moteur chargeur de ressorts Operating device Bobina di comando Bobine Fast-on connection Connessione fast-on Connecteur fast-on
Description Descrizione Description Make contact Contatto di chiusura Contact de fermeture Break contact Contatto di apertura Contact douverture Rectifier bridge Ponte raddrizzatore Pont redresseur
COM
NC NO
Position contact Contatto di posizione Contact du position
-XC/1 1
-XC/13 13
2A
-XC/3 3 11 -XA 22 3B
2B
-XC/3 3 11 -XA 22 3B COM -FCC NC NO 3A
COM -FCM NC NO 1A NC
COM -FCM NO NC
COM -FCC NO 3A AC +
red
-M blue 2 -XC/2 -XC/14 14 15 -XC/15 4
-MC
-MC
4 -XC/4
-XC/4
20
-XC/5 5
-XC/16 16
4A
-XC/7
-XC/9
4B
-XC/7
-XC/9
13 -XA COM -XU NC violet red Printed circuit board -MU blue/green NO 23 7A
13 -XA 23 7A
AC
+
-M01 -M01
17
18 8 8 -XC/8
-XC/6
-XC/17
-XC/18
-XC/8
-XC/10 10
-XC/19
-XC/21
-XC/23
-XC/25
-XC/27
-XC/29
-XC/31
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
31
51
53
71
73
91
93 -XA
32
52
54
72
74
92
94
19A
21A
23A
25A
27A
29A
31A
41
61
63
81
83
101
103 -XA
-MA 42 62 64 82 84 102 104
11 -XC/11
20 -XC/20
22 -XC/22
24 -XC/24
26 -XC/26
28 -XC/28
30 -XC/30
32 -XC/32
21
2 resin CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT 2 TA in resina e 1 toroide omopolare 2 TC en rsine et 1 tore homopolaire
ADR14 1S 50/50N/51/51N B1 B2 +MA -MA B3 B4 C1 I1 For scada C2 Auxiliary voltage 77-250Vac/dc A1 A2 A3 Remote Trip 77-250Vac/dc S1 A4 A5 A6 A7 S2 A8 A9 A10 A11 I3 C6 A12 A14 Latching type contact
-MA
FLAG COIL
TRIP COIL
L1 P1
L2 s1 s2
L3 IL1
P2
P1
s1 s2
IL3
IN
C3 I2 C4 C5
P2
S3
P1
K2
A13 A15 A17
s1 s2
Io1 Io2
C7 Io C8 C9
P2
K3
A16
8A
8A
3 phase toroidal CT 3 toroidi di fase 2 tores de phase
ADR14 1S 50/50N/51/51N B1 B2 +MA -MA IL1 INX B3 B4 C1 I1 C2 For scada C3 I2 C4 P1 s1 s2 P2 IL3 IN C5 I3 C6 A12 A14 Latching type contact S2 S1 Auxiliary voltage 77-250Vac/dc A1 A2 A3 Remote Trip 77-250Vac/dc A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 S3 A10 A11
-MA
FLAG COIL
TRIP COIL
L1 P1 s1 s2 P2
L2
L3
P1
s1 s2
IL2
P2
K2
A13 A15 A17
C7 Io C8 C9
K3
A16
22
8B
3 phase toroidal CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT 3 toroidi di fase e 1 toroide omopolare 3 tores de phase et 1 tore homopolaire
ADR14 1S 50/50N/51/51N B1 B2 +MA -MA B3 B4 C1 I1 For scada C2 S1 Auxiliary voltage 77-250Vac/dc A1 A2 A3 Remote Trip 77-250Vac/dc A4 A5 A6 A7 S2 A8 A9 S3 A10 A11 I3 C6 A12 A14 Latching type contact
-MA
FLAG COIL
TRIP COIL
L1 P1 s1 s2 P2
L2
L3 IL1
P1
s1 s2
IL2
C3 I2 C4
P2 P1 s1 s2 P2 IL3 IN
C5
P1
K2
s1 s2
A13 A15 A17
Io1 Io2
C7 Io C8 C9
P2
K3
A16
8C
2 phase toroidal CT and 1 earth fault toroidal CT 2 toroidi di fase e 1 toroide omopolare 2 tores de phase et 1 tore homopolaire
ADR14 1S 50/50N/51/51N B1 Auxiliary voltage 77-250Vac/dc A1 A2 A3 Remote Trip 77-250Vac/dc S1 For scada A4 A5 I1 C2 C3 I2 C4 A6 A7 S2 A8 A9 S3 A10 A11 I3 C6 A12 A14 Latching type contact
-MA B2 +MA -MA L1 P1 s1 s2 P2 L2 L3 IL1 B3 B4 C1
FLAG COIL
TRIP COIL
P1
s1 s2
IL3 IN
C5
P2
P1 s1 s2 P2
K2
A13 A15 A17
Io1 Io2
C7 Io C8 C9
K3
A16
23
For energizing the world
Via del Commercio, 12/14 26900, Lodi (LO), Italy
Tel. +39 0371 49061 Fax +39 0371 411422
info@sarel.it www.sarel.it
CARLO MAMELI INDUSTRIAL VIDEO PRODUCTION
WL
1236kV
rev. 07/2012
Caratteristiche di funzionamento Operating characteristics Caracteristiques de fonctionnement

Principio di funzionamento: Gli interruttori di manovra sezionatori della serie IM6 sono costituiti da un involucro in resina epossidica riempita in SF6 alla pressione di 150kPa assoluti, sigillati per la vita operativa. (Norme IEC 60265-1) All'interno dell'involucro posizionato un albero isolante sul quale sono assemblati i contatti mobili, mentre i contatti fissi sono montati direttamente sull'involucro. Il movimento di rotazione dell'albero ottenuto attraverso un comando meccanico posto sul fronte dello stesso. L'apparecchio pu assumere tre posizioni, chiuso, aperto, messo a terra, presentando un naturale sistema di interblocco che previene manovre errate. Caratteristiche: Gli interruttori di manovra sezionatori della serie IM6 utilizzano l'esafloruro (SF6) come dielettrico per l'isolamento e l'interruzione. Le parti attive sono installate all'interno di un involucro in resina epossidica rispondente alle normative CEI allegato EE relativo ai sistemi a pressione sigillata Le apparecchiature costituenti la gamma di prodotti isolati in gas SF6 della serie IM6 presentano i seguenti vantaggi: - Vita elettrica elevata - Assenza di manutenzione delle parti attive - Sicurezza di fuzionamento - Livello di sovratensioni limitato Functioning concept: IM6 switches are made of an epoxy cast resin housing filled with SF6 gas at the pressure of 150kPa abs., operative life sealed. (Standard IEC 60265-1) The moving contact are fixed on the insulated rotary shaft inside the cast resin body, while the fixed contacts are mounted directly on the cast resin body. The rotary motion of the shaft is made by an operating mechanism placed on the front. The switch has three different positions: closed, open and earthed, which naturally prevent any wrong operations. Charateristics: IM6 switches use sulphur hexafluoride gas (SF6) for insulation and breaking. The active parts are placed in an insulating enclosure in accordance with the IEC standards for sealed pressure systems. IM6 products offer remarkable characteristics:- Long service life - Maintenance-free active parts - Operating safety - Very low over-voltage level Principe de fonctionnement: Les interrupteurs srie IM6 sont constitues par une enveloppe moule en rsine poxy, rempli en SF6 la pression de 150kPa absolus, scell pour la vie oprationnelle. (Normes IEC 60265-1) Les contacts mobiles sont assembles sur un arbre isolant a linterieur de l'enveloppe, tandis que les contacts fixes sont monts directement sur l'enveloppe. Le mouvement de rotation de l'arbre est obtenu par une commande mcanique place sur le front mme de larbre. L'appareil peut avoir trois positions: ferm, ouvert et mise la terre, et il est dot d'un efficace systme de verrouillage qui prvient les fausses manuvres. Caractristique: Les interrupteurs et sectionneurs IM6 utilisent l'hexafluorure de soufre (SF6) pour l'isolement et la coupure. Les parties actives sont places dans une enveloppe en matire isolante scelle vie, rpondant aux standards IEC annexe EE pour les systmes pression scelle. Les appareils IM6 ont des caractristiques remarquables: - Longue dure de vie - Absence d'entretien des parties actives - Scurit de fonctionnement - Niveau de surtension trs faible
Legenda 1. Controllo campo elettrico 2. Sistema di sbarre 3. Contatto fisso superiore 4. Involucro esterno 5. Contatto fisso di terra 6. Albero di manovra 7. Contatto mobile 8. Contatto fisso inferiore List: 1. Electric field control 2. Busbar system 3. Upper fixed contact 4. External body 5. Earth fixed contact 6. Operating shaft 7. Mouving contact 8. Lower fixed contact Liste 1. Dflecteur de champ lectrique 2. Jeu de barres 3. Contact fixe suprieur 4. Enveloppe exterieure 5. Contact fixe de M.A.T. 6. Arbre de manoeuvre 7. Contact mobile 8. Contact fixe infrieur
Impiego Employment Emploi

Gli interruttori di manovra-sezionatori della serie IM6 sono impiegati per la realizzazione del quadro di media tensione tipo System-6 che costituito da una serie normalizzata, modulare e compatta di scomparti di tipo protetto ed a prova d'arco interno. Con gli scomparti standard possibile realizzare quadri anche con configurazioni complesse. Ogni scomparto corredato di interblocchi meccanici a schema sinottico animato, che assicurano operazioni di manovra in condizioni di assoluta sicurezza. L'esecuzione a tenuta d'arco interno ne consente l'impiego in condizioni d'esercizio e sicurezza particolarmente gravose. Norme di riferimento: CEI EN-62271-200 - IEC 62271-200 - DPR 547 The on-load switches of IM6 series are employed the realization of the medium voltage switchboard, System-6 type that is composed by a standarized, modular and compact series of protected and internally arc-proofed panels. Complex switchboard configurations can be realized using the standard panels. Each panel is equipped with mechanical interlocks and a movable mimic diagram, which grant the maximum safety of operation. Arc-proof execution allows to employ these panels even in extreme conditions. System-6 switchboard complies to the following Standards: CEI EN-62271-200 - IEC 62271-200 - DPR 547 Les interrupteurs type IM6 sont utiliss pour la production du tableau de moyenne tension type System 6 qui est compos par une srie de cellules standards, modulaires et compactes, de type protg et tenue l'arc interne. Les cellules standards peuvent raliser mme des configurations complexes. Chaque cellule est quipe avec des verrouillages mcaniques et d'un schma synoptique qui assurent toute scurit de manuvre. La tenue l'arc interne permet d'employer ces cellules mme en conditions extremes. Le tableu System-6 est conforme aux normes suivantes: CEI EN-62271-200 - IEC 62271-200 - DPR 547
Vista interna scomparto equipaggiato con sezionatore/interruttore in SF6 Medium voltage switchboard equipped with SF6 on load switch Tableau de moyenne tension equip avec interrupteur en SF6
Vista interna scomparto equipaggiato con sezionatore-fusibili IM6P-TF Internal panel view equipped with IM6P-TF switch Vue intrieure de la cellule quipe par sectionneur IM6P-TF
Certificati CESI e ISO Certificates CESI and ISO Certificats CESI et ISO
Rapporti di prova: Gli apparecchi IM6 hanno positivamente superato in laboratori ufficiali tutte le prove di tipo in accordo alle Norme internazionali IEC e GOST. Normative: Rispondenza norme: - IEC 62271-102 - IEC 62271-105 - IEC 265.1 Il sistema di qualit: Il sistema di controllo qualit assicura che l'intero processo di produzione mantenga un livello qualitativamente alto e costante. Prima della fornitura, ciascun quadro sottoposto in fabbrica a minuziose prove e controlli, sia di tipo meccanico sia di tipo elettrico, incluse le prove di accettazione previste dalle normative IEC sopracitate.
Test report: IM6 switches have positively passed, in official laboratories, all type tests according to international Standard IEC and GOST. Standard: Correspondence standard: - IEC 62271-102 - IEC 62271-105 - IEC 265.1 Quality system: The control system quality assures that the entire process of production maintains qualitatively high and constant level. Before the supply, every switchboard is subordinate in factory to meticulous tests and controls, mechanical type and electrical worker, included the tests of previewed acceptance from above mentioned Standard IEC.
Rapports dessai: Les interrupteurs IM6 ont positivement pass, dans les laboratoires officiels, tous les essais de type en accord aux normes internationales CEI et GOST. Normes: Normes de correspondance : - IEC 62271-102 - IEC 62271-105 - IEC 265.1 Le systme de qualit: Le systme de contrle qualit assure que tout le procs de production garde un niveau qualitativement haut et constant. Avant la fourniture chaque tableau est soumis, directement l'usine, des essais et des contrles, soi de type mcanique soi de type lectrique, inclus les essais d'acceptation prvues par les normes IEC ci-dessus indiques.
Caratteristiche elettriche Electrical characteristics Caratteristique elecriques

Tensione nominale Rated voltage Tension nominale Tensione nominale di tenuta alla frequenza di esercizio 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.) Rated power-frequency withstand voltage 50Hz 1Min (kV r.m.s.) Tension nominale la frequence industrielle 50Hz 1Min (kV eff.) Tensione nominale di tenuta ad impulso atmosferico (valore di picco) Rated lightning inpulse withstand voltage (peak value) Te nsi on nominale detenue a u c h o c (kV crte) Corrente nominale Rated current Courant nominale Corrente di breve durata ammissibile Short-time withstand current Courant de courte dure admissible Potere di chiusura Making capacity Pouvoir de fermeture Potere di interruzione Breaking capacity Pouvoir de coupure kV 12 17,5 24 36
Verso massa e tra le fasi To earth and between phases Vers la terre et entre ples Sulla distanza di sezionamento Across the isolating distance Sur la distance de sectionnement Verso massa e tra le fasi To earth and between phases Vers la terre et entre ples Sulla distanza di sezionamento Across the isolating distance Sur la distance de sectionnement
kV
28
38
50
70
kV
32
45
60
80
kV
75
95
125
170
kV
85
110
145
195
kA
400 630 1000 16-1s 20-1s 20-3s 25-1s 40 62,5 400 630 400 630 16
400 630 1000 16-1s 20-1s 20-3s 40 50 400 630 400 630 16
400 630 1000 16-1s 20-1s 20-3s 40 50 400 630 400 630 16
kA
400 630 1000 12,5-1s 16-1s 20-1s 20-2s 31,5 50 400 630 400 630 16
Carico prevalentemente attivo Mainly active load Charge principalment actif Carico ad anello Ring charge Charge de boucle Trasformatori a vuoto No load transformers Transformateurs vide Cavi a vuoto No load cables Cbles vide Disegno esploso di un apparecchio IM6 36kV Exploded drawing of IM6 36kV on-load switch Dessin develope de linterrupeur IM6 36kV
25
25
25
25
Disegno esploso di un apparecchio IM6 1224KV Exploded drawing of IM6 1224KV on-load switch Dessin develope de linterrupeur IM6 1224KV
Comando Operating mechanism Commande

Comando KS Comando STANDARD manuale a passaggio punto morto. Interruttore: L'energia necessaria per la manovra ottenuta comprimendo una molla, con l'aiuto di un'apposita leva, che al passaggio del punto morto provoca la chiusura dell'apparecchio. La rotazione della leva nel senso inverso ricarica la molla e al passaggio del punto morto provoca l'apertura. Di conseguenza la velocit della manovra di chiusura ed apertura indipendente dall'operatore. Sezionatore di terra: La manovra avviene come per il comando dell'interruttore. KS Operating mechanism STANDARD manual operating mechanism dead point passing. Line switch: The necessary energy to operate is obtained, using a proper operating lever, compressing a spring, which passing the dead point releases the energy closing the switch. The rotation of the lever in the opposite direction recharges the spring, which repassing the dead point releases the energy opening the switch.Consequently the speeds of operations are independent from the operator. Earth switch: The operation is the same of the line switch. Commande KS Commande STANDARD manuelle passage de point mort. Interrupteur: L'nergie ncessaire pour la manuvre est obtenue par compression d'une ressort avec un levier, qui passage de point mort provoque la fermeture de l'interrupteur. La rotation du levier dans le sens contraire recharge le ressort, qui passage de point mort provoque l'ouverture. La vitesse des manuvres de fermeture et d'ouverture est indpendante de l'oprateur. Sectionneur de M.A.T.: La manoeuvre est execute comme pour l'interrupteur.
KS
KS-M
Comando KS-M Comando STANDARD MOTORIZZATO a passaggio punto morto. Interruttore di linea: Il principio di funzionamento lo stesso del comando manuale KS, ma oltre alla manovra manuale possibile effettuare la manovra a distanza grazie ad un motore. Il tempo di funzionamento del motore per il cambio di stato inferiore a 7 secondi. Sezionatore di terra: La manovra come quella descritta nel comando KS. KS-M Operating mechanism STANDARD Motorized operating mechanism dead point passing. Line switch: Functioning concept is the same as the manual KS operating mechanism, it can be operate both manually, and remotely by means of a motor. The motor operating time to chance the status of switch is lower than 7 second. Earth switch: The operation is the same as described for KS operating mechanism. Commande KS-M Commande STANDARD MOTORISEE passage de point mort. Interrupteur de ligne: Le principe de fonctionnement est le mme de la commande KS, mais la manuvre distance est possible par un moteur. Le temps de fonctionnement du moteur pour le changement d'tat est infrieur 7 secondes. Sectionneur de M.A.T.: La manuvre est la meme dcrit pour le commande KS.

Comando KP Comando con MOLLE PRECARICATE ad aggancio per apertura e chiusura. Interruttore: L'operatore carica manualmente le molle, che accumulano l'energia necessaria per effettuare la manovra di chiusura e di apertura a mezzo del selettore meccanico o a mezzo delle bobine di chiusura ed apertura. L'indicazione di molle cariche situata sul fronte del comando. Quando il comando montato su un Interruttore combinato con fusibili, l'apertura pu avvenire alla fusione anche di un solo fusibile Sezionatore di terra: La manovra come quella descritta per il per il comando KS. KP Operating mechanism PRECHARGED SPRING operating mechanism with hook to open and close. Line switch: The operator charges manually the springs which store necessary energy for closing and opening with the mechanical selector or through the tripping and closing coils. Indication of spring charged is placed on the front of the operating mechanism. When the operating mechanism is installed on the switch-fuse, the opening can be caused also at the blow up of one single fuse. Earth switch: The operation is the same as described for KS operating mechanism. Commande KP Commande RESSORTS PRECHARGEES accrochage pour ouverture et fermeture. Interrupteur de ligne: L'oprateur charge manuellement les ressorts, qui permet d'accumuler l'nergie ncessaire pour effectuer les manuvres de fermeture et d'ouverture par un slecteur mcanique ou par les bobines de dclenchement et de fermeture. L'indication de ressort charg est situe sur le front de la commande. Si la commande est monte sur un interrupteur-fusibles, l'ouverture peut tre excute la fusion d'un seul fusible. Sectionneur de M.A.T.: La manuvre est la meme dcrit pour le commande KS.
KP
Accessori Accessories Accessoires

Posizione Position Description 1 Descrizione Description Description Schema sinottico con segnali incorporati Mimic diagram with incorporated indicators Schma synoptique avec indicateurs incorpors Dispositivo meccanico per blocco porta Mechanical device for door lock Dispositif mcanique verrouillage porte Segnalazione meccanica molle cariche per chiusura Mechanical indication of springs charged Indication de ressorts charges Segnalazione meccanica intervento fusibile Mechanical indication of fuse blow up Indication de fusion fusible Dispositivo per applicazione lucchetto su Linea/Terra Device for lock installation on Line/Earth Dispositif pour application cadenas sur Ligne/Terre Blocchi a chiave Linea (Chiave libera in aperto) Line key interlocks (key free in open position) Verrouillage a cl-Ligne(cl libre en position ouverte) Blocchi a chiave Linea (Chiave libera in chiuso) Line key interlocks (key free in closed position) Verrouillage a cl-Terre(cl libre en position ferme) Blocchi a chiave Terra (Chiave libera in aperto) Earth key interlocks (key free in open position) Verrouillage a cl-Terre(cl libre en position ouverte) Blocchi a chiave Terra (Chiave libera in chiuso) Earth key interlocks (key free in closed position) Verrouillage a cl-Terre(cl libre en position ferme) Contatti ausiliari Linea/Terra Auxiliary contacts for Line/Earth Contacts auxiliaires Ligne/Terre Contatti ausiliari fusione fusibile Auxiliary contacts for fuse blow up Contacts auxiliaires fusion fusible Sganciatore di apertura 24/48/110/220 Vca/cc Tripping coil 24/48/110/220 Vac/dc Bobine d'ouverture 24/48/110/220 Vca/cc Sganciatore di chiusura 24/48/110/220 Vca/cc Closing coil 24/48/110/220 Vac/dc Bobine de fermeture 24/48/110/220 Vca/cc Scatoletta di segnalazione presenza tensione Voltage indication Indication de prsence tension Selettore 0-1 Selector 0-1 Selecteur 0-1 Morsettiera di connessione Connection terminal box Borne de raccordement Fusibili di protezione circuito ausiliario Fuses for auxiliary circuit protection Fusible de protection circuit auxiliaire Scheda elettromeccanica comando motore Operating monitor card Fiche du commande moteur Motoriduttore per comando a distanza 24/48/110 Vca/cc - 220 Vca Motoreducer for remote operating mechanism 24/48/110 Vac/dc - 220 Vac Motoreductur pour commande distance 24/48/110 Vca/cc - 220 Vac S = di serie S = standard accessories S = accessoires standards O = opzionale O = optional accessories O = accessoires optionnels Tipo - Type - Type KS S KP S KSM S
NP
NP
NP
NP
NP
10
11
NP
NP
12
NP
NP
13
NP
NP
14
15
NP
NP
16
NP
NP
17
NP
NP
18
NP
NP
19
NP
NP
10
NF = non previsto NF = not provided NF = pas prvu
Accessori Accessories Accessoires
11
Dimensioni Dimension Dimension

kV 12 17,5 24 36 A 185,5 185,5 185,5 373,5 B 796 796 796 *(2) C 230 230 230 *(2) D 230 230 230 *(2) E 295 295 295 *(2) F 20,5 20,5 20,5 *(2) G 48,5 48,5 48,5 84,5 H 169 169 169 49 (mm) L 230 230 230 350
M 249,5 249,5 249,5 349,5
N 83 83 83 83
P 150 150 150 150
Q 468 468 468 328
R 237,3 237,3 237,3 237,3
S 157,7 157,7 157,7 162,7
T 196,2 196,2 196,2 307,7
U 185 185 185 373
IM6S - IM6P
fissaggio con vite M10x45 fixing with screw M 10x45 fixsage avec vis M 10x45
divisori capacitivi capacitive dividers diviseur capacitives
fronte quadro front pannel front cellule
kV 12 17,5 24 36 A 248 248 248 373,5 B 870 870 870 *(3) C 230 230 230 *(3) D 13 13 13 13 E 295 295 295 *(3) F 37,5 37,5 37,5 *(3) G 18,5 18,5 18,5 54,5 H 169 169 169 49
(mm) L M 230 249,5 230 249,5 230 249,5 350 349,5
N 83 83 83 83
P *(1) *(1) 300 *(3)
Q 718 718 718 912,5
R 237,3 237,3 237,3 237,3
S 157,7 157,7 157,7 162,7
T 196,2 196,2 196,2 307,7
U 185 185 185 373
W *(1) *(1) 150 150
IM6S-TD
fronte quadro front pannel front cellule divisori capacitivi capacitive dividers diviseur capacitives
12

kV 12 17,5 24 36 A 185,5 185,5 248 373,5 B 870 870 870 *(3) C 230 230 230 *(3) D 13 13 13 13 E 295 295 295 *(3) F 37,5 37,5 37,5 *(3) G 18,5 18,5 18,5 54,5 H 169 169 169 49 L 230 230 230 350 (mm) M 249,5 249,5 249,5 349,5
N 83 83 83 83
P *(1) *(1) 300 *(3)
Q 725 725 725 905
R 237,3 237,3 237,3 237,3
S 157,7 157,7 157,7 162,7
T U 196,2 175,5 196,2 175,5 196,2 175,5 307,7 373
V 292 292 442 534
W *(1) *(1) 150 150
IM6P-TF - IM6S-TF
fronte quadro front pannel front cellule divisori capacitivi capacitive dividers diviseur capacitives
*(1) 12-17,5kV - IM6S-TD; IM6S-TF; IM6P-TF
*(2) 36kV - IM6S; IM6P
*(3) 36kV - IM6S-TD; IM6S-TF; IM6P-TF
* Nota - Note - Note Quote fissaggio traversa apparecchio On-load switch cross-brace fixed dimension Dimension de fissage de la traverse du interrupteur
13

kV 24 con controllori di campo - with field control - avec controlleur de champs A 185,5 B 796 C 230 D 230 E 295 F 20,5 G 51,5 H 169 (mm) L 230 M 249,5 N 83 P 150 Q 468 R 237,3 S 157,7 T 196,2 U 185
IM6S - IM6P
divisori capacitivi capacitive dividers diviseur capacitives fronte quadro front pannel front cellule
kV 24 con controllori di campo - with field control - avec controlleur de champs A 185,5 B 848 C 230 D 230 E 295 F 45,5 G 26,5 H 169
(mm) L 230 M 249,5 N 83 P 150 Q 928 R S T 237,3 157,7 196,2 U 185 W 442
IM6S-TF - IM6P-TF
fronte quadro front pannel front cellule
divisori capacitivi capacitive dividers diviseur capacitives
14
Considerando levoluzione di materiali e Norme, quanto riportato nel presente documento si potr ritenere impegnativo solo dopo nostra conferma. Due to continuous development in material and updating of Standards, date reported are not binding and subject to our revision. tant donn lvolution du matriel ainsi que des Normes, les information contenues dans le prsent document, ne seront considres comme tant valable quaprs confirmation de notre part.
S_IM6S 001rev.0 L/Z 1107
NA60
FEEDER PROTECTION RELAY THE COMPREHENSIVE SOLUTION FOR FEEDERS AND TRANSFORMERS PROTECTION
Application
The relay type NA60 can be typically used in radial or meshed MV and LV networks as feeder or power transformer protection: On radial, ring and parallel feeders of any length in solidly grounded, ungrounded, Petersen coil and/or resistance grounded systems. On parallel connected generators and transformer on the same Busbar. Moreover undervoltage and overvoltage functions are provided as protections or voltage controls. The relay type NA60 can be can be provided with circuits for input phase current suitable for traditional CTs and VTs, or combined ThySensor devices.
52
NA60 74TCS
27 67 49
59 50/51 74VT 74CT
- Protective & control functions

27 49 50/51 50N/51N 59 59N 67 67N BF 74CT 74TCS Undervoltage Thermal image (for lines and transformers) Phase overcurrent Residual overcurrent Overvoltage Residual overvoltage Phase directional overcurrent Ground directional overcurrent Circuit breaker failure CTs monitoringMonitoraggio TA di fase Trip circuit supervision
59N BF 67N 50N/51N Alternative
27
59 50/51 74VT 74CT
67
49
Control functions METERING - I L1..I L3,I E - Oscillography - Events & Faults log
COMMUNICATION - RS232 - Modbus RS485 - Modbus TCP/IP - IEC 870-5-103/DNP3
59N BF 67N 50N/51N
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
Measuring inputs with traditional CTs and VTs

Three phase current inputs and one residual current input, with nominal currents independently selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches. Three phase voltage inputs with programmable nominal voltages within range 50...130 V (UR =100 V) or 200...520 V (UR =400 V) and one residual voltage input, with programmable nominal voltage within range 50...130 V (UER =100 V).
Measures
NA60 provides metering values for phase and residual currents, phase and residual voltage, making them available for reading on a display or to communication interfaces. The input signals can be acquired through the traditional CTs and VTs, or through combined sensors ThySensor including current, voltage measures, standardized lamp voltage presence and isolated in the same component. For residual current measurement (protection 50N/51N and 67N) the installation of a balance current transformer is required, while the residual voltage is derived through vector calculus on the three phase voltages using the sensors ThySensor, or is selectable from the above calculation and the broken Delta VT in versions with traditional VT inputs. Input signals are sampled 24 times per period and the RMS value of the fundamental component is measured using the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and digital ltering. With DFT the RMS value of 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th harmonic of phase current are also measured. On the basis of the direct measurements, several calculated (min, max, average,...), phase, sequence, power, harmonic, demand and energy measures are processed. Measures can be displayed with reference to nominal values or directly expressed in amperes and volts.
Measuring inputs with ThySensor devices

Three phase current inputs, with 630 A nominal current (primary). One residual current input, with nominal currents independently selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches. Three phase voltage inputs with nominal voltage 20/3 kV (primary); the residual voltage has been obtained by vector calculation measures of phase voltages
Firmware updating
The use of ash memory units allows on-site rmware updating.
Construction
According to the hardware congurations, the NA60 protection relay can be shipped in various case styles suitable for the required mounting options (ush, projecting mounting, rack or with separate operator panel) and with connections to input signals suitable for traditional VTs and CTs ( screw terminals) or combined sensors ThySensor (RJ45 connectors for connecting embedded cables)
Blocking input/outputs
One output blocking circuit and one input blocking circuit are provided. The output blocking circuits of one or several Pro_N relays, shunted together, must be connected to the input blocking circuit of the protection relay, which is installed upstream in the electric plant. The output circuit works as a simple contact, whose condition is detected by the input circuit of the upstream protection relay. Use of suitable pilot wire to ber optic converters (BFO) allows to perform fast and reliable accelerated logic selectivity on radial and closed ring networks.
Modular design
In order to extend I/O capability, the NA60 hardware can be customized through external auxiliary modules: MRI - Output relays and LEDs MID16 - Binary inputs MCI - 4...20 mA converter MPT - Pt100 probe inputs.
Output relays
Six output relays are available (two changeover, three make and one break contacts); each relay may be individually programmed as normal state (normally energized, de-energized or pulse) and reset mode (manual or automatic). A programmable timer is provided for each relay (minimum pulse width). The user may program the function of each relay according to a matrix (tripping matrix) structure.
Communication
Multiple communication interfaces are implemented: One RS232 local communication front-end interface for communication with ThySetter setup software. Two back-end interfaces for communication with remote monitoring and control systems by: - RS485 port using ModBus RTU, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol. - Ethernet port (RJ45 or optical ber) using ModBus/TCP protocol.
Binary inputs
Two binary inputs are available with programmable active state (active-ON/active-OFF) and programmable timer (active to OFF/ ON or ON/OFF transitions). Several presettable functions can be associated to each input.
ThySensor
Insulator VT
CT Voltage divider for voltage-detector lamps

2
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
MMI (Man Machine Interface)

The user interface comprises a membrane keyboard, a backlight LCD alphanumeric display and eight LEDs. The green ON LED indicates auxiliary power supply and self diagnostics, two LEDs are dedicated to the Start and Trip (yellow for Start, red for Trip) and ve red LEDs are user assignable.
as a warning for a possible short circuit in the pilot wire or in the output circuit of the downstream protection. The logic selectivity function can be realized through any combination of binary inputs, output relays and/or committed pilot wires circuits.
Self diagnostics
All hardware and software functions are repeatedly checked and any anomalies reported via display messages, communication interfaces, LEDs and output relays. Anomalies may refer to: Hw faults (auxiliary power supply, output relay coil interruptions, MMI board...). Sw faults (boot and run time tests for data base, EEPROM memory checksum failure, data BUS,...). Pilot wire faults (break or short in the wire). Circuit breaker faults.
Event storage
Several useful data are stored for diagnostic purpose; the events are stored into a non volatile memory. They are graded from the newest to the older after the Events readingcommand (ThySetter) is issued: Sequence of Event Recorder (SER). The event recorder runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last three hundred events upon trigger of binary input/output. Sequence of Fault Recorder (SFR). The fault recorder runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last twenty faults upon trigger of binary input/output and/or element pickup (start-trip). Settings recording Following some setting changes the last eight changes are recorded in circular mode (Data Logger CEI 0-16) Trip counters.
Control and monitoring

Several predened functions are implemented: Activation of two set point proles Phase CTs and VTs monitoring (74CT and 74VT) Logic selectivity Cold load pickup (CLP) with block or setting change Trip circuit supervision (74TCS) Second harmonic restraint (inrush) Remote tripping Circuit Breaker commands and diagnostic User dened logic may be customized according to IEC 61131-3 standard protocol (PLC). Circuit Breaker commands and diagnostic Several diagnostic, monitoring and control functions are provided: Health thresholds can be set; when the accumulated duty (I or I2t), the number of operations or the opening time exceeds the threshold an alarm is activated. Breaker failure (BF); breaker status is monitored by means 52a-52b and/or through line current measurements. Trip Circuit Supervision (74TCS). Breaker control; opening and closing commands can be carried out locally or remotely. Cold Load Pickup (CLP) The Cold Load Pickup feature can operate in two following modes: Each protective element can be blocked for a adjustable time. Each threshold can be increased for a programmable time. It is triggered by the circuit breaker closing. Second harmonic restraint To prevent unwanted tripping of the protective functions on transformer inrush current, the protective elements can be blocked when the ratio between the second harmonic current and the relative fundamental current is larger than a user programmable threshold. The function can be programmed to switch an output relay so as to cause a blocking protection relays lacking in second harmonic restraint. Logic selectivity With the aim of providing a fast selective protection system some protective functions may be blocked (pilot wire accelerated logic). To guarantee maximum fail-safety, the relay performs a run time monitoring for pilot wire continuity and pilot wire shorting. Exactly the output blocking circuit periodically produces a pulse, having a small enough width in order to be ignored as an effective blocking signal by the input blocking circuit of the upwards protection, but suitable to prove the continuity of the pilot wire. Furthermore a permanent activation (or better, with a duration longer than a preset time) of the blocking signal is identied,
Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography) [1]

Upon trigger of tripping/starting of each function or external signals, the relay records in COMTRADE format: Oscillography with instantaneous values for transient analysis. RMS values for long time periods analysis. Logic states (binary inputs and output relays).
Note - A license for Digital Fault Recorder function is required, for purchase procedure please contact Thytronic. The records are stored in nonvolatile memory
Programming and settings

All relay programming and adjustment operations may be performed through MMI (Keyboard and display) or using a Personal Computer with the aid of the ThySetter software. The same PC setup software is required to set, monitor and congure all Pro_N devices. Two session level (User or Administrator) with password for sensible data access are provided.
ThySetter
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
SPECIF ICAT IONS

GENERAL Mechanical data
Mounting: ush, projecting, rack or separated operator panel Mass (ush mounting case) 2.0 kg
INPUT CIRCUITS Auxiliary power supply Uaux

Nominal value (range) 24...48 Vac/dc, 115...230 Vac/110...220 Vdc Operative range (each one of the above nominal values) 19...60 Vac/dc - 85...265 Vac/75...300 Vdc Power consumption: 10 W (20 VA) Maximum (energized relays, Ethernet TX) 15 W (25 VA) Maximum (energized relays, Ethernet FX)
Insulation tests
Reference standards High voltage test 50Hz Impulse voltage withstand (1.2/50 s) Insulation resistance EN 60255-5 2 kV 60 s 5 kV >100 M EN 61000-4-29 EN 60255-22-1 EN 60255-22-2 EN 60255-22-4 EN 60255-22-6 EN 60255-4-3 EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-4-16 1 kV-2.5 kV 8 kV 4 kV 10 V 10 V/m 2 kV 1 kA/m 2.5 kV 2 kV 10 V
Phase current inputs with traditional CTs

Nominal current In 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP Switches Permanent overload 25 A Thermal overload (1 s) 500 A Rated consumption (for any phase) 0.002 VA (In = 1 A) 0.04 VA (In = 5 A) Connections M4 terminals
Voltage dip and interruption

Reference standards
EMC tests for interference immunity

1 MHz damped oscillatory wave Electrostatic discharge Fast transient burst (5/50 ns) Conducted radio-frequency elds Radiated radio-frequency elds High energy pulse Magnetic eld 50 Hz Damped oscillatory wave Ring wave Conducted common mode (0...150 kHz)
Residual current input

Nominal current IEn 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP Switch Permanent overload 25 A Thermal overload (1 s) 500 A Rated consumption 0.006 VA (IEn = 1 A), 0.012 VA (IEn = 5 A)
Voltage inputs with traditional VTs

Reference voltage UR 100 V or 400 V selectable on order Nominal voltage Un 50...130 V or 200...520 V adjustable via sw Permanent overload / 1s overload 1.3 UR / 2 UR Rated consumption (for any phase) 0.5 VA
Emission
Reference standards EN 61000-6-4 (ex EN 50081-2) Conducted emission 0.15...30 MHz Class A Radiated emission 30...1000 MHz Class A
Residual voltage input with traditional VTs

Reference voltage UER 100 V Nominal voltage UEn 50...130 V adjustable via sw Permanent overload / 1s overload 1.3 UER / 2 UER Rated consumption 0.5 VA
Climatic tests
Reference standards IEC 60068-x, ENEL R CLI 01, CEI 50 EN 60255-21-1, 21-2, 21-3 EN 61010-1 3 250 V III 5 kV EN 60529 IP52 IP20 -25...+70 C -40...+85 C 10...95 % 70...110 kPa EN 50263 89/336/EEC 73/23/EEC IEC 60255-6
Mechanical tests
Reference standards
Phase inputs with ThySensors

Secondary voltage (Inp = 630 A) Secondary voltage (Unp = 20/3 kV) Connections 200 mV 1.0 V RJ45 clamp 630 A 50 A...1250 A 1.2 Inp 22.5 kA 16 kA 40 kA 20/3 kV 1.8 2 dry inputs 19...265 Vac/19...300 Vdc 3 mA
Safety requirements
Reference standards Pollution degree Reference voltage Overvoltage Pulse voltage Reference standards Protection degree: Front side Rear side, connection terminals
ThySensors primary inputs

Primary nominal current Inp Extended primary current Permanent thermal nominal current Max primary current Thermal overload (3 s) Dynamic overload (half cycle) Primary nominal voltage Unp Permanent overload factor
Environmental conditions
Ambient temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Atmospheric pressure
Binary inputs
Quantity and type Max permissible voltage Max consumption, energized
Certifications
Product standard for measuring relays CE conformity EMC Directive Low Voltage Directive Type tests
Block input (Logic selectivity)

Quantity and type 1 powered by internal isolated supply Max consumption, energized 5 mA
OUTPUT CIRCUITS Output relays K1...K6

Quantity 6 changeover (SPDT, type C) Type of contacts K1, K2 make (SPST-NO, type A) Type of contacts K3, K4, K5 break (SPST-NC, type B) Type of contacts K6 Nominal current 8A Nominal voltage/max switching voltage 250 Vac/400 Vac Breaking capacity: 50 W Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) 1250 VA Alternating current ( = 0,4) Make 1000 W/VA Short duration current (0,5 s) 30 A
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
Local PC RS232 19200 bps Network: 1200...57600 bps RS485 100 Mbps Ethernet 100BaseT Protocol ModBus RTU/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3, TCP/IP
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
Block output (Logic selectivity)

Quantity Type 1 optocoupler 8 1 1 1 5
Undervoltage - 27
Common conguration: Voltage measurement type for 27 (U type27) [1] 27 Operating logic (Logic 27) U< Element U< Curve type (U<Curve) Denite time 27 First threshold denite time (U <def) U<def Operating time (t U<def ) Inverse time 27 First threshold inverse time (U <inv) U<inv Operating time (t U<inv) U ph-ph / U ph-n AND/OR
LEDs
Quantity ON/fail (green) Start (yellow) Trip (red) Allocatable (red)
DEFINITE, INVERSE [2] 0.05...1.10 U n / E n 0.03...100.0 s 0.05...1.10 U n / E n 0.10...100.0 s
GENERAL SETTINGS Rated values (traditional CTs an VTs versions)

Relay nominal frequency (f n) 50, 60 Hz Relay phase nominal current (In) 1 A, 5 A Phase CT nominal primary current (Inp) 1 A...10 kA Relay residual nominal current (IEn) 1 A, 5 A Residual CT nominal primary current (IEnp) 1 A...10 kA Relay nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Un) 50...130 V or 200...520 V Relay nominal voltage (phase-to-ground) En= Un/3 Line VT primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Unp) 50 V..500 kV Relay residual nominal voltage (direct measure) (UEn) 50...130 V Residual primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) 3 (UEnp) 50 V...500 kV
U<< Element Denite time 27 Second threshold denite time (U <<def) 0.05...1.10 U n / E n U<<def Operating time (t U<<def ) 0.03...100.0 s Note [1] - With U ph-ph setting all threshold are in p.u. U n With U ph-n setting all threshold are in p.u. E n
Note [2] - The mathematical formula for INVERSE curves is: t = 0.75 t U < inv / [1 - (U/U< inv)], where: t = trip time (in seconds) t U< inv = operating time setting (in seconds) U = input voltage U<inv = threshold setting
Rated values (ThySensor input versions)

Relay nominal frequency (f n) 50, 60 Hz Phase CT nominal primary current (Inp)[1] 1 A...10 kA Relay residual nominal current (IEn) 1 A, 5 A Residual CT nominal primary current (IEnp) 1 A...10 kA Relay nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Un) 50...130 V or 200...520 V Relay nominal voltage (phase-to-ground) En= Un/3 Line VT primary nominal voltage (phase-to-phase) (Unp) 50 V..500 kV Relay residual nominal voltage (calculated) UECN = Un 3 = 3 En
Note [1] - It represents the reference value to which they are expressed all the settings and corresponds to the rated primary current sensors
Thermal image - 49
Common conguration: Initial thermal image IN (Dth IN ) Reduction factor at inrush (KINR) Thermal time constant (T ) DthCLP Activation time (t DthCLP) DthAL1 Element 49 First alarm threshold AL1 (Dth AL1) DthAL2 Element 49 Second alarm threshold AL2 (Dth AL 2 ) Dth> Element 49 Trip threshold (Dth >) 0.0...1.0 B 1.0...3.0 1...200 min 0.00...100.0 s 0.3...1.0 B 0.5...1.2 B 1.100...1.300 B
Binary input timers

ON delay time (IN1 tON, IN2 tON) OFF delay time (IN1 tOFF, IN2 tOFF) Logic 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...100.0 s Active-ON/Active-OFF 0.000...0.500 s
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (traditional CTs versions)

I> Element DEFINITE I> Curve type (I>Curve) IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, RECTIFIER, I2t or EM ICLP > Activation time (t CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s I> Reset time delay (t > RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 50/51 First threshold denite time (I > def ) 0.100...40.0 In I > def within CLP (ICLP>def ) 0.100...40.0 In I > def Operating time (t > def ) 0.04...200 s Inverse time 50/51 First threshold inverse time (I >inv) 0.100...20.00 In I >inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.100...20.00 In I >inv Operating time (t >inv) 0.02...60.0 s I>> Element Type characteristic ICLP >> Activation time (t CLP>>) I>> Reset time delay (t >> RES) Denite time 50/51 Second threshold denite time (I >> def ) I >> def within CLP (ICLP>>def ) I >> def Operating time (t >> def ) Inverse time 50/51 Second threshold inverse time (I >>inv) I >>inv within CLP (ICLP>>inv) I >>inv Operating time (t >>inv) I>>> Element ICLP >>> Activation time (t CLP>>>) I>>> Reset time delay (t >>> RES) Denite time 50/51 Third threshold denite time (I >>> def ) I>>>def within CLP (ICLP>>>def ) I>>>def Operating time (t >>> def ) DEFINITE or I2t 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...100.0 s 0.100...40.0 In 0.100...40.0 In 0.03...10.00 s 0.100...20.00 In 0.100...20.00 In 0.02...10.00 s 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...100.0 s 0.100...40.0 In 0.100...40.0 In 0.03...10.00 s
5
Relay output timers

Minimum pulse width (t TR)
PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS Base current IB (traditional CTs versions)

Base current (IB) 0.10...2.50 In
Note - The base current IB represents the rated current of the component of the protected (line, transformer ,...), expressed in relation to the CT rated current. Since usually the secondary current rating of the line CT coincides with the current rating of the relay, the IB value must be set to the ratio of the nominal current of the protected equipment and the CT primary rated current.
Base current IB (ThySensor versions)

Base current (IB) 0.10...2.50 In
Note - The base current IB represents the rated current of the component of the protected (line, transformer ,...), expressed in relation to the CT rated current. The IB value must be set to the ratio of the nominal current of the protected equipment and the ThySensor primary current (630 A).
Thermal protection with RTD thermometric probes - 26

Alarm Alarm threshold ALx (x=1...8) Operating time t ALx (x=1...8) Trip Trip threshold >x (x=1...8) Operating time t >x (x=1...8) 0...200 C 0....100 s 0...200 C 0....100 s
Note: The element becomes available when the MPT module is enabled and connected to Thybus
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 (ThySensor versions)

I> Element DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, I> Curve type (I>Curve) ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI,, RECTIFIER, I2t or EM ICLP > Activation time (t CLP>) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...100.0 s I> Reset time delay (t > RES) Denite time 50/51 First threshold denite time (I > def ) 0.010...30.0 In I > def within CLP (ICLP>def ) 0.010...30.0 In I > def Operating time (t > def ) 0.04...200 s Inverse time 50/51 First threshold inverse time (I >inv) 0.010...20.00 In I >inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) 0.010...20.00 In I >inv Operating time (t >inv) 0.02...60.0 s I>> Element Type characteristic ICLP >> Activation time (t CLP>>) I>> Reset time delay (t >> RES) Denite time 50/51 Second threshold denite time (I >> def ) I >> def within CLP (ICLP>>def ) I >> def Operating time (t >> def ) Inverse time 50/51 Second threshold inverse time (I >>inv) I >>inv within CLP (ICLP>>inv) I >>inv Operating time (t >>inv) I>>> Element ICLP >>> Activation time (t CLP>>>) I>>> Reset time delay (t >>> RES) Denite time 50/51 Third threshold denite time (I >>> def ) I>>>def within CLP (ICLP>>>def ) I>>>def Operating time (t >>> def ) DEFINITE or I2t 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...100.0 s 0.010...30.0 In 0.010...30.0 In 0.03...10.00 s 0.010...20.00 In 0.010...20.00 In 0.02...10.00 s 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...100.0 s 0.010...30.0 In 0.010...30.0 In 0.03...10.00 s
Inverse time 59 First threshold inverse time (U >inv) 0.50...1.50 U n / E n U>inv Operating time (t U>inv) 0.10...100.0 s U>> Element Denite time 59 Second threshold denite time (U >>def) 0.50...1.50 U n / E n U>>def Operating time (t U>> def ) 0.03...100.0 s Note [1] - With U ph-ph setting all threshold are in p.u. U n With U ph-n setting all threshold are in p.u. E n
Note [2] - The mathematical formula for INVERSE curves is: t = 0.5 t U > inv / [(U/U> inv)-1], where: t = trip time (in seconds) t U> inv = operating time setting (in seconds) U = input voltage U>inv = threshold setting
Residual overvoltage - 59N (traditional VTs versions)

Common conguration: Residual voltage measurement for 59N- direct/calc. U E /U EC 59N Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint59N ) OFF/Block 59N Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText59N ) OFF/Block U E > Element DEFINITE, INVERSE [1] U E > Curve type (U E >Curve) 0.00...100.0 s U E> Reset time delay (t UE>RES) Denite time 59N First threshold denite time (U E >def) 0.01...0.70 U En U E>def Operating time (t UE >def) 0.07...100.0 s Inverse time 59N First threshold inverse time (U E >inv) 0.01...0.50 U En U E>inv Operating time (t UE >inv) 0.10...100.0 s U E >> Element U E>> Reset time delay (t UE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s 59N Second threshold denite time (U E >>def) 0.01...0.70 U En U E>>def Operating time (t UE >>def) 0.07...100.0 s
Note [1] - The mathematical formula for INVERSE curves is: t = 0.5 t UE > inv / [(UE /UE > inv)-1 where: t = trip time (in seconds) t UE> inv = operating time setting (in seconds) UE = residual input voltage U E> inv = threshold setting
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N

IE> Element IE> Curve type (IE>Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM IECLP > Activation time (t ECLP>) 0.00...100.0 s IE> Reset time delay (t E> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 50N/51N First threshold denite time (I E>def) 0.002...10.00 IEn IE>def within CLP (IECLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IE>def Operating time (t E> def) 0.04...200 s Inverse time 50N/51N First threshold inverse time (IE >inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn IE>inv within CLP (IECLP>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn IE>inv Operating time (t E>inv) 0.02...60.0 s IE>> Element IECLP >> Activation time (t ECLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s IE>> Reset time delay (t E>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 50N/51N Second threshold denite time (IE>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEn IE>>def within CLP (IECLP>>def ) 0.02...10.00 IEn IE>>def Operating time (t E>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s IE>>> Element IECLP >>> Activation time (t ECLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s IECLP >>> Reset time delay (t E>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 50N/51N Third threshold denite time (I E>>>def) 0.002...10.00 IEn IECLP >>> def within CLP (IECLP>>>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IECLP >>> def Operating time (t E>>> def ) 0.03...10.00 s
Residual overvoltage - 59N (ThySensor versions)

Common conguration: U EC Residual voltage measurement for 59N- calculated 59N Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint59N ) OFF/Block 59N Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText59N ) OFF/Block U E > Element U E > Curve type (U E >Curve) DEFINITE, INVERSE [1] U E> Reset time delay (t UE>RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 59N First threshold denite time (U E >def) 0.01...0.70 U En U E>def Operating time (t UE >def) 0.07...100.0 s Inverse time 59N First threshold inverse time (U E >inv) 0.01...0.50 U En U E>inv Operating time (t UE >inv) 0.10...100.0 s U E >> Element U E>> Reset time delay (t UE>>RES) 0.00...100.0 s 59N Second threshold denite time (U E >>def) 0.01...0.70 U En U E>>def Operating time (t UE >>def) 0.07...100.0 s
Note [1] - The mathematical formula for INVERSE curves is: t = 0.5 t UE > inv / [(UEC /UE > inv)-1 where: t = trip time (in seconds) t UE> inv = operating time setting (in seconds) UEC = residual input voltage (calculated) U E> inv = threshold setting
Overvoltage - 59
Common conguration: Voltage measurement type for 59 (U type59) [1] U ph-ph / U ph-n 59 Operating logic (Logic 59) AND/OR U> Element DEFINITE, INVERSE [2] U> Curve type (U>Curve) Denite time 59 First threshold denite time (U >def) 0.50...1.50 U n / E n U>def Operating time (t U> def ) 0.03...100.0 s
6
Phase directional overcurrent - 67 (CTs and VTs versions)

Common conguration: I /I cos 67 Operating mode (Mode67 ) 1/3 / 2/3 67 Operating logic (Logic 67) 67 Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint67 ) OFF/Block/Not directional 67 Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText67 ) OFF/Block/Not directional
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
IPD> Element DEFINITE, IPD> Curve type (IPD> Curve) IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, RECTIFIER, I2t or EM IPDCLP > Activation time (t PDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s IPD> Reset time delay (t PD > RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 0.100...40.0 In 67 First threshold denite time (IPD > def ) IPD > def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>def ) 0...359 IPD > def within CLP (IPDCLP>def ) 0.100...40.0 In IPD > def Operating time (t PD > def ) 0.05...200 s Inverse time 67 First threshold inverse time (IPD >inv) 0.100...10.0 In IPD >inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>inv) 0...359 IPD >inv within CLP (IPDCLP>inv) 0.100...10.0 In IPD >inv Operating time (t PD >inv) 0.02...60.0 s IPD>> Element IPD> Curve type (IPD>> Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, RECTIFIER, I2t or EM IPDCLP >> Activation time (t PDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s IPD>> Reset time delay (t PD >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67 Second threshold denite time (IPD >> def ) 0.100...40.0 In IPD >> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>def ) 0...359 IPD >> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In IPD >> def Operating time (t PD >> def ) 0.04...200 s Inverse time 67 Second threshold inverse time (IPD >>inv) 0.100...10.0 In IPD >>inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>inv) 0...359 IPD >>inv within CLP (IPDCLP>>inv) 0.100...10.0 In IPD >>inv Operating time (t PD >>inv) 0.02...60.0 s IPD>>> Element IPDCLP >>> Activation time (t PDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s IPD>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67 Third threshold denite time (IPD >>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In IPD >>> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>def ) 0...359 IPD >>> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In IPD >>> def Operating time (t PD >>> def ) 0.04...10.00 s IPD>>>> Element IPDCLP >>>> Activation time (t PDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s IPD>>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67 Fourth threshold denite time (IPD >>>> def ) 0.100...40.0 In IPD >>>> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>>def ) 0...359 IPD >>>> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>>def ) 0.100...40.0 In IPD >>>> def Operating time (t PD >>>> def ) 0.04...10.00 s
IPD>> Element IPD> Curve type (IPD>> Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI RECTIFIER, I2t or EM IPDCLP >> Activation time (t PDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s IPD>> Reset time delay (t PD >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67 Second threshold denite time (IPD >> def ) 0.010...30.0 In IPD >> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>def ) 0...359 IPD >> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>def ) 0.010...30.0 In IPD >> def Operating time (t PD >> def ) 0.04...200 s Inverse time 67 Second threshold inverse time (IPD >>inv) 0.010...10.00 In IPD >>inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>inv) 0...359 IPD >>inv within CLP (IPDCLP>>inv) 0.010...10.00 In IPD >>inv Operating time (t PD >>inv) 0.02...60.0 s IPD>>> Element IPDCLP >>> Activation time (t PDCLP>>>) IPD>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>> RES) Denite time 67 Third threshold denite time (IPD >>> def ) IPD >>> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>def ) IPD >>> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>def ) IPD >>> def Operating time (t PD >>> def ) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...100.0 s 0.010...30.0 In 0...359 0.010...30.0 In 0.04...10.00 s
IPD>>>> Element IPDCLP >>>> Activation time (t PDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s IPD>>>> Reset time delay (t PD >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67 Fourth threshold denite time (IPD >>>> def ) 0.010...30.0 In IPD >>>> def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>>>>def ) 0...359 IPD >>>> def within CLP (IPDCLP>>>>def ) 0.010...30.0 In IPD >>>> def Operating time (t PD >>>> def ) 0.04...10.00 s
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (traditional CTs)

Common conguration: I /I cos 67N Operating mode (Mode67N ) Residual voltage measurement type for 67N - direct/calculated (3VoType67N ) U E / U EC 67N Multiplier of threshold for insensitive zone (M ) 1.5...10.0 67N Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint67N ) OFF/Block/Not directional 67N Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText67N ) OFF/Block/Not directional IED> Element IED> Curve type DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM IEDCLP > Activation time (t EDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s IED> Reset time delay (t ED > RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67N First threshold denite time (IED > def - UED > def ) Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED > def within CLP (IEDCLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IED > def Operating time (t ED > def ) 0.05...200 s Inverse time 67N First threshold inverse time (IED >inv - UED >inv) Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP >inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn IED >inv Operating time (t ED >inv) 0.02...60.0 s IED>> Element IED> Curve type (IED>> Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM IEDCLP >> Activation time (t EDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s IED>> Reset time delay (t ED >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67N Second threshold denite time (IED >> def - UED >> def )
7
Phase directional overcurrent - 67 (ThySensor versions)

Common conguration: I /I cos 67 Operating mode (Mode67 ) 1/3 / 2/3 67 Operating logic (Logic 67) 67 Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint67 ) OFF/Block/Not directional 67 Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText67 ) OFF/Block/Not directional IPD> Element IPD> Curve type (IPD> Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, RECTIFIER, I2t or EM IPDCLP > Activation time (t PDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s IPD> Reset time delay (t PD > RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67 First threshold denite time (IPD > def ) IPD > def characteristic angle (ThetaPD>def ) IPD > def within CLP (IPDCLP>def ) IPD > def Operating time (t PD > def ) Inverse time 67 First threshold inverse time (IPD >inv) IPD >inv characteristic angle (ThetaPD>inv) IPD >inv within CLP (IPDCLP>inv) IPD >inv Operating time (t PD >inv) 0.010...30.0 In 0...359 0.010...30.0 In 0.05...200 s 0.010...10.00 In 0...359 0.010...10.00 In 0.02...60.0 s
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >> def within CLP (IEDCLP >> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IED >> def Operating time (t ED >> def ) 0.05...10.00 s Inverse time 67N Second threshold inverse time (IED >>inv - UED >>inv) Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP>>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn IED >inv Operating time (t ED >>inv) 0.02...10.00 s IED>>> Element IEDCLP >>> Activation time (t EDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s IED>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67N Third threshold denite time (IED >>> def - UED >>> def ) Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IED >>> def Operating time (t ED >>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s IED>>>> Element IEDCLP >>>> Activation time (t EDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s IED>>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67N Fourth threshold denite time (IED >>>> def - UED >>>> def ) Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >>>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IED >>>> def Operating time (t ED >>>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s
Denite time 67N Second threshold denite time (IED >> def - UED >> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn Residual current pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Residual voltage pickup value Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >> def within CLP (IEDCLP >> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IED >> def Operating time (t ED >> def ) 0.05...10.00 s Inverse time 67N Second threshold inverse time (IED >>inv - UED >>inv) Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP>>inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn IED >inv Operating time (t ED >>inv) 0.02...10.00 s IED>>> Element IEDCLP >>> Activation time (t EDCLP>>>) 0.00...100.0 s IED>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67N Third threshold denite time (IED >>> def - UED >>> def ) Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IED >>> def Operating time (t ED >>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s IED>>>> Element IEDCLP >>>> Activation time (t EDCLP>>>>) 0.00...100.0 s IED>>>> Reset time delay (t ED >>>> RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67N Fourth threshold denite time (IED >>>> def - UED >>>> def ) Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >>>> def within CLP (IEDCLP >>>> def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IED >>>> def Operating time (t ED >>>> def ) 0.05...10.00 s
Directional earth fault overcurrent - 67N (Thysensor)

Common conguration: I /I cos 67N Operating mode (Mode67N ) Residual voltage measurement U EC 67N Multiplier of threshold for insensitive zone (M ) 1.5...10.0 67N Operating mode from 74VT internal (74VTint67N ) OFF/Block/Not directional 67N Operating mode from 74VT external (74VText67N ) OFF/Block/Not directional IED> Element IED> Curve type DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM IEDCLP > Activation time (t EDCLP>) 0.00...100.0 s IED> Reset time delay (t ED > RES) 0.00...100.0 s Denite time 67N First threshold denite time (IED > def - UED > def ) Residual current pickup value 0.002...10.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED > def within CLP (IEDCLP>def ) 0.002...10.00 IEn IED > def Operating time (t ED > def ) 0.05...200 s Inverse time 67N First threshold inverse time (IED >inv - UED >inv) Residual current pickup value 0.002...2.00 IEn Residual voltage pickup value 0.004...0.500 UEn Characteristic angle 0...359 Half operating sector 1...180 IED >inv within CLP (IEDCLP >inv) 0.002...2.00 IEn IED >inv Operating time (t ED >inv) 0.02...60.0 s IED>> Element IED> Curve type (IED>> Curve) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI, EM IEDCLP >> Activation time (t EDCLP>>) 0.00...100.0 s IED>> Reset time delay (t ED >> RES) 0.00...100.0 s
8
Selective block - BLOCK2

Selective block IN: BLIN Max activation time for phase protections (tB-IPh)0.10...10.00 s BLIN Max activation time for earth protections (tB-IE) 0.10...10.00 s Selective block OUT: BLOUT Dropout time delay for phase protections (tF-IPh) 0.00...1.00 s BLOUT Drop-out time delay for phase protections (tF-IE) 0.00...1.00 s BLOUT Drop-out time delay for phase and earth protections (tF-IPh/IE) 0.00...1.00 s
Internal selective block - BLOCK4

Output internal selective block dropout time for phase protections (t F-IPh) 0.00...10.00 s Output internal selective block dropout time for ground protections (t F-IE ) 0.00...10.00 s
Breaker failure - BF
BF Phase current threshold (IBF >) BF Residual current threshold (IEBF >) BF Time delay (t BF) 0.05...1.00 In 0.01..2.00 IEn 0.06...10.00 s 10...50 % 0.00...100.0 s
Second Harmonic Restraint - 2ndh-REST

Second harmonic restraint threshold (I2ndh>) I2ndh> Reset time delay (t 2ndh>RES)
VT supervision - 74VT
74VT Negative sequence overvoltage threshold (U2VT>) 0.05...0.50 En 74VT Negative sequence overvoltage threshold (I2VT>) 0.05...0.50 In 74VT Phase undervoltage threshold (U VT<) 0.05...0.50 En 74VT Minimum change of current threshold 74VT (DIVT<) 0.05...0.50 In 74VT Undercurrent inhibition threshold (I VT<) 0.100...40.0 In 74VT Alarm time delay (t V T-A L ) 0.0...10.0 s
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
CT supervision - 74CT
74CT Threshold (S<) 74CT Overcurrent threshold (I * ) S< Operating time (t S <) 0.10...0.95 0.10...1.00 I n 0.03...200 s 0...10000 0...5000 In 0.05...1.00 s 0...5000 I n2.s 0.05...1.00 s
5th harmonic: Fifth harmonic phase currents Demand phase currents: Phase xed currents demand Phase rolling currents demand Phase peak currents demand Phase minimum currents demand Demand power: Fixed active power demand Fixed reactive power demand Rolling active power demand Rolling reactive power demand Peak active power demand Peak reactive power demand Minimum active power demand Minimum reactive power demand Energy: Positive active energy Negative active energy Total active energy Positive reactive energy Negative reactive energy Total reactive energy
I L1-5th , I L 2-5th , I L 3-5th I L1FIX , I L 2FIX , I L 3FIX I L1ROL , I L 2ROL , I L 3ROL I L1MA X , I L 2MA X , I L 3MA X I L1MIN , I L 2MIN , I L 3MIN P FIX Q FIX P ROL Q ROL P MA X Q MA X P MIN Q MIN EA+ EAEA EQ+ EQEQ
Circuit Breaker supervision

Number of CB trips (N.Open) Cumulative CB tripping currents (SumI) CB opening time for I^2t calculation (t break ) Cumulative CB tripping I^2t (SumI^2t) CB max allowed opening time (t break >)
Pilot wire diagnostic

BLOUT1 Diagnostic pulses period (PulseBLOUT1) OFF - 0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s BLIN1 Diagnostic pulses control time interval (PulseBLIN1) OFF - 0.1-1-5-10-60-120 s
METERING & RECORDING Measured parameters

Direct: f Frequency I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 Fundamental RMS phase currents U L1, U L 2 , U L 3 Fundamental RMS phase voltages Fundamental RMS residual current IE Fundamental RMS residual voltage (Traditional VTs) UE Calculated: Thermal image DTheta Fundamental RMS phase-to-phase voltages U 12 , U 23 , U 31 Fundamental RMS calculated residual voltage U EC Maximum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 I Lmax Minimum current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 I Lmin Average current between I L1-I L 2 -I L 3 IL Maximum voltage between U L1- U L 2 - U L 3 U Lmax Average voltage between U L1- U L 2 - U L 3 UL Maximum voltage between U 12 - U 23 - U 31 U max Average voltage between U 12 - U 23 - U 31 U Phase: Displacement angle of I L1 respect to U L1 PhiL1 Displacement angle of I L 2 respect to U L 2 PhiL2 Displacement angle of I L 3 respect to U L 3 PhiL3 Displacement angle of I L1 respect to U 23 Alpha1 Displacement angle of I L 2 respect to U 31 Alpha2 Displacement angle of I L 3 respect to U 12 Alpha3 Displacement angle of U E respect to I E (traditional V Ts) PhiE Displacement angle of U EC respect to I E PhiEC Sequence: Positive sequence current I1 Negative sequence current I2 Negative sequence current/positive sequence current ratio I 2 /I 1 Negative sequence voltage U2 Power: Total active power Total reactive power Total apparent power Power factor Phase active powers Phase reactive powers Power factors P Q S cosPhi P L1, P L 2 , P L 3 Q L1, Q L 2 , Q L 3 cosPhiL1, cosPhiL2, cosPhiL3
Fault recording (SFR)

Number of faults 20 Recording mode circular Trigger: Output relays of enabled protection or control element (OFF-ON) IN1...INx External trigger (binary inputs) Data recorded: 0...10 9 Counter (resettable by ThySetter) Date and time Time stamp tripped element Cause I L1r, I L 2r, I L 3r Fundamental RMS phase currents Fundamental RMS residual current I Er Fundamental RMS phase voltages U L1r, U L 2r, U L 3r Fundamental RMS phase-to-phase voltages U 12r, U 23r, U 31r Fundamental RMS residual voltages (measured and calculated) U Er, U ECr Displacement angles (IL1-UL1, IL2-UL2, IL3-UL3) PhiL1r, PhiL2r, PhiL3r Displacement angles (IL1-U23, IL2-U31, IL3-UL3) Alpha1r, Alpha2r, Alpha3r Displacement angle UE-IE (traditional VTs) PhiEr Displacement angle UEC-IE PhiECr Thermal image DTheta- r Binary inputs state IN1, IN2...INx Output relays state K1...K6...K10 Fault cause info (operating phase) L1, L2, L3
Event recording (SER)

Number of events 300 Recording mode circular Trigger: Start/Trip of enabled protection or control element IN1...INx Binary inputs switching (OFF/ON or ON/OFF) Setting changes Power UP/Power DOWN Auxiliary supply Data recorded: 0...10 9 Counter (resettable by ThySetter) Cause binary input/trip/setting change/Power ON/OFF Time stamp Date and time
2nd harmonic: Second harmonic phase currents I L1-2nd , I L 2-2nd , I L 3-2nd Maximum of the second harmonic phase currents/fundamental component percentage ratio I -2nd /I L 3rd harmonic: Third harmonic phase currents I L1-3rd , I L 2-3rd , I L 3-3rd Third harmonic residual current I E-3rd Third harmonic residual voltage (traditional VTs) U E-3rd 4th harmonic: Fourth harmonic phase currents I L1-4th , I L 2-4th , I L 3-4th
Settings recording
Number of setting changes Recording mode Data recorded: Setting counter Setting data Time stamp 8 circular 0...109 description and parameter Date and time
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography) [1]

File format Records Recording mode Sampling rate Trigger setup: Pre-trigger time Post-trigger time Trigger from inputs Trigger from outputs Communication COMTRADE depending on setting [2] circular > 1 kHz 0.05...1.00 s 0.05...60.00 s IN1, IN2...INx K1...K6...K10 ThySetter
Note 1- A licence for the digital fault recorder function is required. The oscillography records are stored in non-volatile memory. Note [2] - For instance, with following setting: 0.25 s Pre-trigger time 0.25 s Post-trigger time Sampled channels i L1, i L2 , i L3 , i E I L1, I L2 , I L3 , I E Analog channels Digital channels K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, IN1, IN2 More than three hundred records can be stored
Set sample channels: i L1, i L2, i L3, i E Instantaneous currents Instantaneous voltages u L1, u L2, u L3, u E Set analog channels (Analog 1...12): Frequency f Fundamental RMS phase currents I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 Fundamental RMS residual current IE Fundamental RMS phase voltages U L1, U L 2 , U L 3 Fundamental RMS residual voltage UE Fundamental RMS phase-to-phase voltages U 12 , U 23 , U 31 Fundamental RMS calculated residual voltage U EC Displacement angles IL1-UL1, IL2-UL2, IL3-UL3 PhiL1, PhiL2, PhiL3 Displacement angles IL1-U23, IL2-U31, IL3-UL3 Alpha1, Alpha2, Alpha3 Displacement angle UE-IE (traditional VTs) PhiE Displacement angle UEC-IE PhiEC Second harmonic phase currents I L1-2nd , I L 2-2nd , I L 3 -2nd Maximum of the second harmonic phase currents/fundamental component percentage ratio I -2nd /I L Temperature T1...T8 Set digital channels (Digital 1...12): Output relays state Binary inputs state K1...K6...K10 IN1, IN2...INx
Oscillography (DFR)
10
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
Protective elements
L1 L2 L3
BUSBAR
NA60
(*) Antiferrorisonance dn dn dn A B C N N N n n n da db dc a b c (*) B7 B8 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
UL2 UL1 UE
59N
27
UL3
59
74VT
67 49
P1 S1 S2 P2
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 IL2 IL1
50/51 74CT
50BF
IL3
OPERATION (**)
P1 S1 S2 P2
C7 C8
IE
50N/51N
67N
CB position
LOAD (***)
(**) OPERATION FOR: - 67 elements with characteristic angle adjusted within 0... 90 or 270 ...359 ranges - 67N elements for insulated neutral systems and characteristic angle setting = 90 (***) MEASUREMENTS: - Positive sign for measurement of active power and energy with passive load - Negative sign for measurement of active power and energy with generators NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
BINARY INPUTS
NA60-fun.ai
11
Connection diagram example with CTs and VTs inputs
L1 L2 BUSBAR L3
A N dn da
D1
NA60
A1 A2 A3
C1
C2 F1 RX F2 F3 TX F4 F5
n a
K1
B1
VOLTAGE INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 R (*) B8
U L1
K2
U L2
K3 K4 K5 K6
A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14
A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 C7 C8 C3 C4
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 C5 C6 B6 B7 B8
U L3
UE
(*) Antiferroresonance
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
P1 S1 S2 P2
E1
P1 S1 S2 P2
RS485
I L1
CURRENT INPUTS
BA+
I L2
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
Supervision unit
I L3
C7 C8
IE
ETHERNET
D1
HUB
67, 67N OPERATION (**)
A1 A2
RUN
BUS
ON
MODULO 4 RELE + 8 INGRESSI DIGITALI 4 RELAYS + 8 BINARY INPUTS MODULE
UAUX
THYBUS
E1
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46
45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
OUTPUT
INPUT
MRI
BLOCK OUT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
BLOCK IN
A17 A18
BLOUTBLOUT+
A15 A16
A19
LOAD (***)
A20 A21 A22
IN2
(**) OPERATION FOR: - 67 elements with characteristic angle adjusted within 0... 90 or 270 ...359 ranges - 67N elements for insulated neutral systems and characteristic angle setting = 90 (***) MEASUREMENTS: - Positive sign for measurement of active power and energy with passive load - Negative sign for measurement of active power and energy with generators
12
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
RS232
IN1
BINARY INPUTS
Connection diagram example with ThySensor inputs
L1 L2 SBARRE L3
NA60
K1
P1
K2
ThySensor INPUTS
IL1-UL1 P2 IL2-UL2
OUTPUT RELAYS
K3 K4 K5 K6
A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14
IL3-UL3
D1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22
C1
C2 F1 RX F2 F3
Residual current INPUT
RS485
TX
F4 F5
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5
P1 S1 S2 P2
C1 C2
IE
BA+
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
L1
B6 B7 B8
L2
ETHERNET
D1
L3
A1 A2
THYBUS
E1
UAUX
E1
BLOCK OUT
BLOCK IN
67, 67N OPERATION (*)
A17 A18
BLOUTBLOUT+
A15 A16
A19 A20 A21 A22
IN2
LINEA (**)
(*) OPERATION FOR: - 67 elements with characteristic angle adjusted within 0... 90 or 270 ...359 ranges - 67N elements for insulated neutral systems and characteristic angle setting = 90 (**) MESUREMENTS: - Positive sign for measurement of active power and energy with passive load - Negative sign for measurement of active power and energy with generators NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
RS232
IN1
BINARY INPUTS
13
ThySensor
110 100 50
Mounting hole M10 Cable gland
Mounting hole M10
Spacer 8mm M4
P2
P1
104 Capacitive divider output 110 62 42 25 96 225
14
P1
Busbar mounting hole M12
20
Busbar mounting hole M12
20
14
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
DIMENSIONS
FRONT VIEW
120
REAR VIEW
128.5 110
107
101
4.5
D1
D1
4.5
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
C1
C2 F1 RX F2 F3 F4 F5
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 B1 A9
C1
TX C3 C4
TX C3 C4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 C5 C6 B6 B7 B8
177
171
149
ON
START
ON
START TRIP
80
TRIP
A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22
B4 B5 C5 C6 B6 B7 B8
200 168
A10 A11
B2 B3
A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22
C7
C8
C7
C8
31
E1
E1
FLUSH MOUNTING
PROJECTING MOUNTING
FLUSH MOUNTING
20 PROJECTING MOUNTING (Separate operator panel)
SIDE VIEW
212.5 205 30 5 30 4.5 25 15 275
FLUSH MOUNTING
170 PROJECTING MOUNTING (Separate operator panel)
SEPARATE OPERATOR PANEL
PROJECTING MOUNTING (Stand alone)
RACK MOUNTING
482.6 465
FLUSH MOUNTING CUTOUT

102.5 0.3 70
177 (4U) 101.6
ON
START TRIP
ON
START TRIP
ON
START TRIP
ON
START TRIP
161 154
N.4 holes 3.5
NA60 - Flyer- 09 - 2011
15
www.thytronic.it
A PERSONALISED SERVICE OF THE PRODUCTION, A RAPID DELIVERY, A COMPETITIVE PRICE AND AN ATTENTIVE EVALUATION OF OUR CUSTOMERS NEEDS, HAVE ALL CONTRIBUTED IN MAKING US ONE OF THE BEST AND MOST RELIABLE PRODUCERS OF PROTECTIVE RELAYS. FORTY YEARS OF EXPERIENCE HAS MADE STANDARD THESE ADVANTAGES THAT ARE GREATLY APPRECIATED BY LARGE COMPANIES THAT DEAL ON THE INTERNATIONAL MARKET. A HIGHLY QUALIFIED AND MOTIVATED STAFF PERMITS US TO OFFER AN AVANT-GARDE PRODUCT AND SERVICE WHICH MEET ALL SAFETY AND CONTINUITY DEMANDS, VITAL IN THE GENERATION OF ELECTRIC POWER. OUR COMPANY PHILOSOPHY HAS HAD A POSITIVE REACTION FROM THE MARKET BY BACKING OUR COMMITMENT AND HENCE STIMULATING OUR GROWTH.
Headquarter: 20139 Milano - Piazza Mistral, 7 - Tel. +39 02 574 957 01 ra - Fax +39 02 574 037 63 Factory: 35127 Padova - Z.I. Sud - Via dellArtigianato, 48 - Tel. +39 049 894 770 1 ra - Fax +39 049 870 139 0
www.thytronic.it
www.thytronic.com
thytronic@thytronic.it
Medidor ALPHA Plus
Como un medidor trifsico multifuncin con medicin de energa activa y reactiva, validacin de servicio, PQM, perfil de carga y comunicaciones: ALPHA Plus significa medicin avanzada
El medidor ALPHA Plus es un medidor avanzado, construido en base a la tecnologa de medicin ALPHA. El medidor puede utilizarse en sistemas monofsicos o trifsicos, posee un amplio rango de operacin, es multitarifa, realiza la validacin del servicio y puede monitorear la Calidad de Energa, adems provee lecturas del perfil de carga mediante comunicaciones remotas.
Monitoreo de Calidad de Energa (PQM)

Cuando esta caracterstica est habilitada, el medidor ALPHA Plus busca excepciones a los umbrales definidos por el usuario tales como voltaje, corriente, factor de potencia y distorsin armnica total. El medidor realiza varias pruebas que miden y almacenan datos de calidad de energa las 24 horas del da.
Funciones y caractersticas avanzadas

La tarjeta principal posee una memoria de 28kB disponible para almacenar datos del perfil de carga y el registro de eventos. Con intervalos de 15 minutos puede almacenar: Canales 1 Canal 4 Canales Das mx. de almacenamiento 141 das* 36 das*
Pruebas de servicio
Las pruebas de servicio se ejecutan para verificar la validez del servicio elctrico as como la correcta conexin del medidor. El medidor ALPHA Plus verifica el tipo de servicio, rotacin o inversin de fase y la validez de los voltajes de fase. El medidor tambin determina si las corrientes de fase estn dentro de los umbrales definidos por el usuario.
* El nmero de das depende de la cantidad de eventos a almacenar en el Registro de Eventos.
Medicin para facturacin

Los medidores A1RL+ miden, almacenan y muestran una lista completa de valores de energa y demanda tales como kW, kVAR, kWh, kVARh. El medidor A1RL+ ofrece valores vectoriales de kVA como alternativa de cantidad medida.
El perfil de carga es almacenado en una memoria no voltil. El medidor ALPHA Plus graba: el da y la hora de fallas de energa, cambios a modo test, cambios de hora y reseteos de la demanda. Cuando el Monitoreo de Calidad de Energa est habilitado, el medidor incluye tambin el da y la hora de los eventos PQM (incluyendo cadas de voltaje).
www.elster.com
Tecnologa que impulsa el desarrollo ELSTER es el lder en telemedicin: el medidor ALPHA Plus permite la lectura y programacin de manera remota, pudiendo ser integrados en sistemas de medicin.
Instrumentacin
Los valores de instrumentacin proveen de un anlisis casi instantneo del servicio elctrico. Todas las opciones pueden ser programadas para mostrarse en la pantalla en el modo normal o alterno. Valores por cada fase: Voltaje y corriente. ngulos de voltaje y corriente de fase (comparados con la fase A). ngulo de la corriente de fase en relacin al voltaje de fase. Factor de potencia y el ngulo del factor de potencia. kW, kVAR y kVA. Frecuencia del sistema. kW, kVAR, kVA, factor de potencia y ngulo del factor de potencia del sistema.
Comunicaciones
Los datos pueden ser obtenidos usando el puerto ptico (estndar). Adicionalmente al puerto ptico, hay disponibles otras interfaces de comunicacin para realizar lecturas remotas como: Mdem telefnico interno de 2400 baudios con sistema de llamada por apagones. Interfaz serial RS-232. Interfaz serial RS-485. Salidas KYZ.
Sobre el Grupo ELSTER

Lder mundial en infraestructura de medicin avanzada, medicin integrada y aplicacin de soluciones para las industrias de gas, electricidad y agua. Los sistemas y soluciones de ELSTER son producto de ms de 170 aos de experiencia en medicin de recursos y energa. Elster provee soluciones y tecnologa avanzada para ayudar a las empresas a adquirir y utilizar los sistemas de medicin de una manera ms fcil, eficiente y confiable para mejorar el servicio al cliente, aumentar la eficiencia operacional e incrementar ingresos. Las soluciones AMI de ELSTER permiten a las empresas distribuir adecuadamente los recursos de gas, electricidad y agua mejorando significativamente la relacin costo-eficiencia.
Especificaciones Tcnicas
Precisin Corriente mxima Con carga = (0.2 + (0.001 (clase/I) (1 + tan ))) % Continua hasta 120% de la corriente nominal del medidor Temporal (1 seg.) a 200% de la corriente mxima del medidor Rango de Corriente 0 hasta Amperios de clase del medidor Forma 1S y 3S Corriente de Arranque 10mA para clase 20 100mA para clase 200 160mA para clase 320 Nominal 120V a 480V Frecuencia Rango de temperatura Rango de humedad 50Hz o 60Hz 5% -40 C a +85C (dentro de la tapa del medidor) 0% a 100% (sin condensacin) Fuente de alimentacin Consumo Menor a 3W Test realizado ANSI C37.90.1 Oscilatorio Variacin frente a la onda de voltaje Transiente rpido ANSI C62.41 IEC 61000-4-4 ANSI C12.1 dielctrico Deslizamiento 0.000A (sin corriente) Precisin del reloj interno Capacidad de operacin durante apagones Circuito voltimtrico 0.008W @ 120V 0.03 W @ 240V 0.04 W @ 480V Resultado 2.5 kV, 2500 impulsos 5 kV, 2500 impulsos 6 kV a 1.2/50 s, 10 impulsos 4 kV, 2.5 Khz. Impulsos repetitivos durante 1 minuto 2.5 kV, 60 Hz durante un minuto Circuito amperimtrico Tpico 0.1m a 25C Otras formas 5mA para clase 20 50mA para clase 200 80mA para clase 320 Operacin 96V a 528V
Rangos de Voltaje
Las dimensiones son referenciales y estn expresadas en: pulgadas [milmetros]. No usarlas para construccin
No mayor de un pulso medido por cantidad, de acuerdo a los requerimientos de la norma ANSI C12.1 Cumple con los lmites ANSI de 0.02% usando el cristal de 32.768 kHz. El comportamiento inicial esperado es igual o menor que 55 segundos por mes a temperatura a la sombra. Supercondensador con valor nominal de 0.1F, 5.5V 6 horas a 25C Unidad Batera de Litio LiSOCl2 vida til sin uso de 20 aos, en trabajo continuo a 25C 5 aos Valor nominal: 800mAhr Caja con 4 medidores 13.46 libras [6.11 kg] 26.02 libras [11.82 kg]
ELSTER Medidores S.A.

Av. La Marina 842 La Perla - Callao 4 Per T +51 (1) 457 5533 F +51 (1) 457 5686 www.elster.com 2008 por Elster. Todos los derechos reservados.
La informacin contenida puede cambiar sin previo aviso. Las especificaciones tcnicas de los productos citados son aquellas que tienen vigencia al momento de la publicacin. Impreso en el Per.
Pesos de despacho (valores aproximados) Comunicaciones Puerto ptico Comunicaciones remotas Pas de Fabricacin
Base S Base A
5.06 libras [2.30 kg] 7.38 libras [3.35 kg]
300 a 28,800 bps 1,200 a 19,200 bps Estados Unidos
www.elster.com
NA011
PHASE & RESIDUAL OVERCURRENT, AUTOMATIC RECLOSURE PROTECTION RELAY
MANUAL
NA011- Manual - 05 - 2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION 5
Scope and liability ...........................................................................................................................................................................................5 Applicability ......................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Conformity ........................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Technical support ............................................................................................................................................................................................5 Copyright...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Warranty ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Safety recommendations ...............................................................................................................................................................................5 Insulation tests ................................................................................................................................................................................................5 Product identification .....................................................................................................................................................................................6 Environment .....................................................................................................................................................................................................6 Graphical conventions ...................................................................................................................................................................................6 Glossary/definitions ........................................................................................................................................................................................6
2 GENERAL
10
Preface........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 Photo .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10 Main features.................................................................................................................................................................................................11
3 TECHNICAL DATA
12
3.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................................................................................12 Mechanical data ...........................................................................................................................................................................................12 Insulation ........................................................................................................................................................................................................12 EMC tests for interference immunity .........................................................................................................................................................12 Voltage dip and interruption ........................................................................................................................................................................12 EMC tests for interference immunity .........................................................................................................................................................12 Emission ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Mechanical tests.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Climatic tests................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Safety ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 Certifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13 3.2 INPUT CIRCUITS ...............................................................................................................................................................................................14 Auxiliary power supply U aux .......................................................................................................................................................................14 Phase current input circuits ........................................................................................................................................................................14 Residual current input circuit......................................................................................................................................................................14 Binary input circuits......................................................................................................................................................................................14 3.3 OUTPUT CIRCUITS ............................................................................................................................................................................................14 Output relays ..................................................................................................................................................................................................14 3.4 MMI .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................15 3.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES ...................................................................................................................................................................15 Local port ........................................................................................................................................................................................................15 Remote ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................................15 3.6 GENERAL SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................................................................15 3.7 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS .................................................................................................................................................................................15 Phase overcurrent - 50/51............................................................................................................................................................................15 Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N .................................................................................................................................................................17 3.8 CONTROL AND MONITORING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Circuit Breaker monitoring ......................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Oscillography (DFR) ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 3.9 MEASURES ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Measures....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Digital inputs ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18 Automatic Reclose ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 18 Circuit Breaker.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
4 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
19
4.1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................................................ 19 Power supply board ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 19 CPU board...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 Input board .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20 MMI (keyboard, LED and display) ............................................................................................................................................................. 20 4.2 SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................................................................................21 Kernel ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................21 Drivers .............................................................................................................................................................................................................21 Application......................................................................................................................................................................................................21 Base protocol (kernel) ..................................................................................................................................................................................21 Calibration (kernel)........................................................................................................................................................................................21
2 2 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
Communication (drivers) ..............................................................................................................................................................................21 MMI (drivers) .................................................................................................................................................................................................21 Data Base (application/drivers) ..................................................................................................................................................................22 Self-test (application) ...................................................................................................................................................................................22 Development tools ........................................................................................................................................................................................22 4.3 I/O DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 23 Metering inputs ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 23 Signal processing ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 23 Use of measured values...............................................................................................................................................................................24 Binary inputs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................25 Output relays ..................................................................................................................................................................................................26 LED indicators ................................................................................................................................................................................................27 Communication interfaces.......................................................................................................................................................................... 28 4.4 PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS ................................................................................................................................................................................ 29 Phase overcurrent - 50/51............................................................................................................................................................................31 Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N .................................................................................................................................................................34 Breaker failure - BF.......................................................................................................................................................................................37 4.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING ....................................................................................................................................................................... 38 Circuit breaker supervision ........................................................................................................................................................................ 38 Circuit breaker commands ......................................................................................................................................................................... 38 Automatic reclosure - 79 ............................................................................................................................................................................. 39 Test ................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 43 Oscillography ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
5 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
44
Measures........................................................................................................................................................................................................44 Circuit breaker ...............................................................................................................................................................................................44 Counters..........................................................................................................................................................................................................44 Fault recording - SFR ....................................................................................................................................................................................44 Event recording - Events ..............................................................................................................................................................................44 Info ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................45 Protections trip ..............................................................................................................................................................................................45 Self-test ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................45 Oscillography - DFR ......................................................................................................................................................................................45
6 INSTALLATION
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7
47
PACKAGING .......................................................................................................................................................................................................47 MOUNTING ........................................................................................................................................................................................................47 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS ......................................................................................................................................................................... 49 NOMINAL CURRENT I n AND I En SETTINGS ................................................................................................................................................54 NOMINAL CURRENT I n SETTING FOR LPCT ...............................................................................................................................................56 LED ALLOCATION ..............................................................................................................................................................................................57 FINAL OPERATIONS .........................................................................................................................................................................................57
7 PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS
58
7.1 SW ThySetter.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 58 ThySetter installation ................................................................................................................................................................................... 58 ThySetter use ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 58 7.2 MMI (Man Machine Interface) ..................................................................................................................................................................... 59 Reading variables (READ) ........................................................................................................................................................................... 59 Setting modifying (SET) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 59 Test .................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 60 Communication ..............................................................................................................................................................................................61 Reset................................................................................................................................................................................................................61 DEFAULT (Option) ..........................................................................................................................................................................................61 Data/time setting (Time) ...............................................................................................................................................................................61 Circuit breaker commands ..........................................................................................................................................................................61 7.3 MENU TREE........................................................................................................................................................................................................62 7.4 MAINTENANCE .................................................................................................................................................................................................67 7.5 REPAIR ................................................................................................................................................................................................................67 7.6 PACKAGING .......................................................................................................................................................................................................67
8 APPENDIX
68
8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves .................................................................................................................................................... 68 Mathematical formula ................................................................................................................................................................................. 68 Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) ..................................................................... 69 Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ............................................................................. 70 Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) .....................................................................71 Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A) ...........................................................72 Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B) ................................................................... 73
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 3
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C) ..........................................................74 8.2 APPENDIX A2 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves .........................................................................................................................................75 Mathematical formula ..................................................................................................................................................................................75 Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)..............................................................................76 Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) ...........................................................................................77 Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ................................................................................. 78 Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI) .................................................................. 79 Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI) ................................................................................ 80 Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI) ........................................................................81 8.2 APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram ...........................................................................................................................................................................82 8.3 APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces ............................................................................................................................................................................. 83 8.4 APPENDIX B3 - Connection diagrams ..........................................................................................................................................................84 8.5 APPENDIX C - Dimensions ............................................................................................................................................................................. 88 8.6 APPENDIX D - Revisions history ................................................................................................................................................................... 89 8.7 APPENDIX E - EC Declaration of conformity ............................................................................................................................................... 90
4 4
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
1
Scope and liability
INTRODUCTION
This document describes the functions, the technical data of NA011 devices; instructions for mounting, setting and commissioning are included. This manual has been checked out, however, deviations from the description cannot be completely ruled out, so that no liability in a legal sense for correctness and completeness of the information or from any damage that might result from its use is formally disclaimed. The information given in this document is reviewed regularly; any corrections and integration will be included in subsequent editions that are identied by the date of revision. We appreciate any suggestions for improvement. We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice.
Applicability
This manual is valid for NA011 devices with rmware version 1.00 and following. Revision history is listed in appendix.
Conformity
The product complies with the CEE directives: EMC Council Directives: 89/336/EEC Low voltage Directives: 73/23/EEC
Technical support
Contact: THYTRONIC Technical Service www.thytronic.it
Copyright
All right reserved; It is forbidden to copy, modify or store material (document and sw) protected by copyright without Thytronic consent.
Warranty
Thytronic warrants devices against defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of retail purchase by the original end-user purchaser (Warranty Period).
Safety recommendations
The warming contained in this document are all-important for safety; special attention must be paid to the following symbols: Death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING CAUTION
Minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken Installation and commissioning must be carried out by qualied person; Thytronic assumes no responsibility for damages caused from improper use that does not comply all warning and caution in this manual. In particular the following requirements must be met: Remove power before opening it. Verify the voltage absence by means suitable instrumentation on relay connections; attention must be paid to all circuits supplied by external sources (binary input, CT, etc...) Care must be taken when handling metal parts (front panel, connectors). Settings must be established on the basis of a coordination study. Numerical values inside examples have educational purpose only; they dont be used, in no way, for actual applications.
CAUTION
Insulation tests
After insulation tests, hazardous voltages (capacitor charges,...) may be arise; it is advisable to gradually reduce the test voltage avoiding to erase it abruptly.
INTRODUCTION
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
Product identication
Each device is equipped with: Identication label installed on the front side with following informations: code number, phase and residual nominal currents, auxiliary voltage range and CE mark:
In
5A 1A
5A
UAUX 24-230 Vac/dc 1 2 3 4 5

50-51 50N-51N CB OPEN CB CLOSED 79
In 5A 1A 5A IEn 1A 1A 5A UAUX 24-230 Vac/dc 1 2 3 4 5

NA011#xxx0
NA011#xxx2
In Rated 50...500A In Extended 50...1250A UAUX 24-230 V 1 2 3 4 5

In Rated 50...500A In Extended 50...1250A

IEn 1A 1A 5A
UAUX 24-230 V
1 2 3 4 5
NA011#xxx1
NA011#xxx3
Test label with following informations: data, serial number and test operator signature.
Environment
The NA011 device must be employed according to the environment conditions shown (see technical data). In case of different environment conditions, appropriate provisions must be provided (conditioning system, humidity control, etc...). If contaminants are present (dust, corrosive substances, etc...), filters must be provided.
Graphical conventions
The CEI/IEC and ANSI symbols is employed where possible: e.g.: 51 = ANSI code concerning the overcurrent element. Following text formats are used: The ThySetter[1] menu: Phase overcurrent -50/51 The parameter description (measures, thresholds, operate time,...) and related value: First threshold 50/51 denite time I>def The display messages (MMI) are shown as: NA011 Notes are highlighted with cursive letters inside colored bar
Note: Useful description note
Glossary/denitions
I En I Enp In I np 50/51 50N/51N 79
DFR SER SFR ANSI IEEE IEC CENELEC Relay residual nominal current Residual CT primary nominal current Relay phase nominal current Phase CT primary nominal current Phase overcurrent ANSI code Residual overcurrent ANSI code Automatic reclosing Digital Fault Recorder (Oscillography) Sequential Event Recorder Sequential Fault Recorder American National Standard Institute Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers International Electrotechnical Commission Comit Europen de Normalisation Electrotechnique
Note 1 The graphic interface and the operation of the ThySetter software are described in the relative chapters
6 6 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 INTRODUCTION
52 o CB (Circuit Breaker) 52a
52b K1...K4 tTR1... tTR4 Latched No-latched CT or TA LPCT P1 P2 S1 S2 Self test Start Trip Operating time
Circuit Breaker Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the same position as the breaker. It can be assigned to a binary input to locate the CB position (Breaker failure and/or CB diagnostic functions). (52a open = CB open) Auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the opposite position as the breaker (52b open = CB closed) Output relays Output relay minimum pulse width Output relay with latched operation (manual reset) Output relay with latched operation (automatic reset) Output relay with no-latched operation (automatic reset) Current Transformer Low Power Current Transformer IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to a ANSI dot) IEC nomenclature for primary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to a ANSI no-dot) IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to a ANSI dot) IEC nomenclature for secondary polarity mark of CTs (as an alternative to a ANSI no-dot) Diagnostic Leave an initial condition or reset condition (Pickup) Operation (with operate time)
Duration of time interval between the instant when the characteristic quantity in reset condition is changed, under specied conditions, and the instant when the relay operates Dropout ratio The ratio of a reset value to an operate value in well-specied conditions. The dropout ratio may be lower or greater than 1 according as an over or under element is considered Reset time Duration of the time interval between the instant when the characteristic quantity in operate condition is changed, under specied conditions, and the instant when the relay operates. The stated reset time is related to a step variation of characteristic quantity in operate condition to the reset condition. Overshoot time The critical impulse time for a relay which is in its reset condition, is the longest duration a specied change in the input energizing quantity(ies) (characteristic quantity), which will cause the relay to change to operate condition, can be applied without the relay switches. The overshoot time is the difference from the operate time and the critical impulse time. The declared values for the overshoot time are applicable with the lower setting value of the operation time. MMI (Man Machine Interface) Operator front panel ThySetter Log le J2SE Sw Fw Upgrade XML Setting and monitoring software A text le that lists actions that have occurred (ThySetter). Java Platform Standard Edition Software Firmware Firmware upgrade eXtensible Markup Language
INTRODUCTION
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
Symbols
I >> Threshold setting (e.g. pickup I >>). The value is available for reading and is adjustable by means ThySetter + MMI. Limit block (I>> threshold).
I I L1 I L2 I L3
I I >>
Ma x [ I L1 , I L2 , I L3 ]
Computation block (Max phase current)
Curve type (denite/inverse time)
I>> Start
Logic internal signal (output); may be a logical state (e.g.I>> Start) or a numerical value It is available for reading (ThySetter + communication interface) Logic external signal (intput); may be a command coming from a binary input or a sw command It is available for reading (ThySetter + communication interface) Internal signal (e.g. Breaker Failure output state concerning to the 2nd threshold of the 50 element) It is not available for reading (missing arrow)
IPh Block2
I>> BF_OUT
Switch
&
&
AND and NAND logic gates
OR and NOR logic gates
=1
EXOR logic gate

INPUT
t ON
t ON
t ON
t ON
t ON
T
RESET
ON delay timer with reset (t ON delay)

OUTPUT
RESET t
INPUT t ON
ON delay timer without reset (t ON delay)

OUTPUT
t ON
t ON
t ON
INPUT t DROP
OFF delay timer (dropout) without reset (t DROP delay)

OUTPUT
t ON
t DROP
t ON
Symbols.ai
8 8
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
INTRODUCTION
INPUT t DROP t ON t ON t DROP t ON t DROP
0
RESET
OFF delay timer (dropout) with reset (t DROP delay)

OUTPUT
RESET t DROP t
INPUT t TR
Minimum pulse width operation for output relays (t TR)

OUTPUT
t TR
t TR
INPUT
Latched
Latched operating mode for output relays and LEDs

OUTPUT t
INPUT t TR t TR t TR
Pulse operating mode for output relays

OUTPUT t
Symbols1 .ai
INTRODUCTION
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
2
Preface
GENERAL
The relay type NA011 can be used in radial networks as feeder or power transformer protection. In solidly grounded systems the residual overcurrent protection can be used on feeders of any length, while in ungrounded or Petersen coil and/or resistance grounded systems, the residual overcurrent protection can be used on feeders of small length in order to avoid unwanted trippings due to the capacitive current contribution of the feeder on external ground fault. Beside to the phase and residual overcurrent protections, the automatic reclosing function is provided. The NA011 protection relay may be shipped with traditional CTs or low power (LPCT) current inputs; for both versions, the residual overcurrent protection can use the measured (CTs or balanced transformer) or the calculated residual current. Following input circuits are available:
Phase current inputs

Traditional CTs Three phase current inputs with secondary nominal currents independently selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches. Low power CTs Three phase current inputs with primary nominal currents independently selectable through DIPswitches and software.

Measured residual current One residual current input with secondary nominal current selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIPswitches. Calculated residual current Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents, measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors. Setting, programming and reading operations must be effected by means of Personal Computer with ThySetter software or by means of remote communication interface (RS485 bus); all operations must be performed through MMI. The NA011 hardware case is suitable for ash and rack mounting Other options are: Auxiliary power supply operating range. Communication protocols (Modbus or IEC60870-5-103).
Photo
10
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
GENERAL
Main features
Metallic case. Backlight LCD 2x16 Display. Eight LEDs that may be joined with matrix criteria to many and various functions. RESET key to clear LED indications and latched output relays. Three binary inputs. Independently settable for start, trip, self-test and control four output relay (K1...K4) Each output relay may be set with normally energized or normally de-energized operating mode and manual or automatic reset (latched/no-latched). Rear RS485 port, with ModBus protocol. RS232 front serial port (local communication for Thysetter). Real time clock with super capacitor backup. The most signicant constructive features are: Galvanically insulated input and output circuits (communication and binary circuits included). Fast sampling rate for inputs. Optimum ltering of input signals through combined use of analog and digital lters. Traditional electromechanical-type nal output contacts with continuous monitoring of control coil continuity. Auxiliary supply comprising a switching-type voltage stabilizing circuit having a very wide working range and a very small power dissipation Nominal frequency: 50 or 60 Hz. The most signicant operating features are: Programming of operating modes and parameters by means of the front keys and alphanumeric display, with a programming procedure based on carrying out guided selections and on explicit and immediate signalling of the operations being performed, so that such procedure can be carried out without coding tables or mnemonic informations. The feature modication operations do not interrupt the normal functions of the relay. Impossibility of programming unacceptable parameter values, thanks to the automatic limitation of top and bottom scale values for the relative setting ranges. Currents are sampled 64 times per period and measured in the effective value (RMS) of the fundamental component using the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and digital lters. The fault recorder (SFR) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last twenty events upon trigger of binary input/output and/or element pickup (start-trip). The event recorder (SER) runs continuously capturing in circular mode the last three hundred events upon trigger of binary input/output. Digital fault recorder (DFR) in COMTRADE format (oscillography).
GENERAL
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
11
3
3.1 GENERAL
T E C H N I C A L D ATA
Mechanical data
Mounting External dimensions Terminals Mass Reference standards Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code) Front Terminals Flush, Rack 177 x 107 x 105 (high x width x depth) screw connection 1.2 kg EN 60529, EN 60529/A1 IP52 IP20
Insulation
Reference standards High voltage test (50 Hz 60 s) Auxiliary power supply Input circuits Output circuits Output circuits (between open contacts) Communication interfaces Impulse voltage withstand test (1.2/50 s): Auxiliary power supply Input circuits Output circuits Output circuits (between open contacts) Insulation resistance EN 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 2 kV 2 kV 2 kV 1 kV 500 V 5 kV 5 kV 5 kV 2.5 kV >100 M

Reference standards EN 50263 Product standard for measuring relays EN 61000-6-2 Generic standards immunity for industrial environments Electromagnetic compatibility requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment EN 60255-26 Apparati di automazione e controllo per centrali e stazioni elettriche ENEL REMC 02 Compatibilit elettromagnetica - Immunit Normativa di compatibilit elettromeccanica per apparati e sistemi ENEL REMC 01
Voltage dip and interruption

Reference standards EN 61000-4-29 IEC 60255-22-11 Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on dc input power port immunity tests Auxiliary power supply in dc energizing quantity Interruption (UT=40%) Interruption (UT=0%) Voltage variations (UT=80...120%) 100 ms 50 ms 10 s

Reference standards Damped oscillatory wave 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz common mode 0.1 MHz and 1 MHz differential mode Ring wave common mode Ring wave differential mode Reference standards Electrostatic discharge Contact discharge Air discharge Reference standards Radiated radio-frequency elds 80...1000 MHz AM 80% 900 MHz Pulse modulated
12 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
EN 60255-22-1 IEC 60255-22-1 EN 61000-4-12 EN 61000-4-12 2.5 kV 1.0 kV 2.0 kV 1.0 kV EN 60255-22-2 IEC 60255-22-2 EN 61000-4-2 IEC 61000-4-2 6 kV 8 kV EN 60255-22-3 IEC 60255-22-3 EN 61000-4-3 IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m 10 V/m
TECHNICAL DATA
Reference standards Fast transient burst (5/50 ns) Auxiliary power supply Input circuits Reference standards High energy pulse Uaux (line-to-ground 10 ohm, 9 F) Uaux (line-to-line 0 ohm, 18 F) I/O ports (line-to-ground 40 ohm, 0.5 F) I/O ports (line-to-line 40 ohm, 0.5 F) Reference standards Conducted radio-frequency elds 0.15...80 MHz AM 80% 1kHz Reference standards Power frequency immunity tests Dc voltage 50 Hz continuously 50 Hz 1 s 0.015...150 kHz Reference standards Magnetic eld 50 Hz 50 Hz continuously 50 Hz 1 s Reference standards Damped oscillatory magnetic eld Damped oscillatory wave 0.1 MHz Damped oscillatory wave 1 MHz
EN 60255-22-4 IEC 60255-22-4 EN 61000-4-4 IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV 4 kV EN 60255-22-5 IEC 60255-22-5 EN 61000-4-5 IEC 61000-4-5 2 kV 1 kV 2 kV 1 kV EN 60255-22-6 IEC 60255-22-6 EN 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-6 10 V EN 60255-22-7 IEC 60255-22-7 EN 61000-4-16 IEC 61000-4-16 30 V 30 V 300 V 30 V EN 61000-4-8 IEC 61000-4-8 100 A/m 1 kA/m EN 61000-4-10 IEC 61000-4-10 30 A/m 30 A/m
Emission
Reference standards Electromagnetic emission tests Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.15...0.5 MHz Conducted emission auxiliary power supply 0.5...30 MHz Radiated emission 30...230 MHz Radiated emission 230...1000 MHz 79 dB V 73 dB V 40 dB V/m 47 dB V/m EN 60255-25 IEC 60255-25 EN 61000-6-4 IEC 61000-6-4 EN 55011 CISPR 11
Mechanical tests
Reference standards EN 60255-21-1 EN 60255-21-2 RMEC01 Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests on measuring relays and protection equipment Class 1 EN 60255-21-1 Vibration tests (sinusoidal) EN 60255-21-2 Shock and bump test Class 1
Climatic tests
Reference standards Operating temperature Storage temperature Permissible relative humidity Atmospheric pressure IEC 60068-x ENEL R CLI 01 CEI 50 -25...+70 C -40...+85 C 10...95 % 70...110 kPa
Safety
Reference standards EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use Pollution degree 3 Reference voltage 250 V Overvoltage category III
Certications
Reference standards Product standard for measuring relays CE Conformity EMC Directive Low Voltage Directive Type tests
TECHNICAL DATA NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
EN 50263 89/336/EEC 73/23/EEC IEC 60255-6

13
3.2
INPUT CIRCUITS
Voltage Nominal value (range)[1] Operative range Inrush current (max) 24 V 48 V 110 V 230 V~ Frequency (for alternate voltage supply) Max distortion factor ( for alternating voltage supply) Max alternating component (for dc voltage supply): Full wave rectied sine wave Sine wave Power consumption: Maximum (energized relays, three LEDs, backlight ON) Maximum (energized relays, three LEDs, backlight ON)
Auxiliary power supply U aux

24...230 V~/19...265 V~/19...300 V3 A, 1 ms 5 A, 1 ms 10 A, 1 ms 40 A, 1 ms 45...66 Hz 15% 100 % 80 % 4.5 W (U AUX = 24 V-) 9 VA (U AUX = 230 V~)
Phase current input circuits

Standard CTs: Connections Relay nominal phase current I n Permanent overload Thermal overload (1 s) Dynamic overload (half cycle) Rated consumption (for any phase) LPCT - Low Power Current Transformers: Connections Relay nominal phase current I n Extended primary current Max primary current Nominal secondary voltage (with Inp = 100 A) RJ45 plug 100 A 50 A...1250 A selectable by DIP-switch 12.5 kA 22.5 mV M4 terminals 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP-switch 25 A 500 A 1250 A 0.002 VA with I n =1 A 0.04 VA with I n =5 A
Residual current input circuit[2]

Relay nominal residual current I En Permanent overload Thermal overload (1 s) Dynamic overload (half cycle) Rated consumption 1 A or 5 A selectable by DIP-switch 25 A 500 A 1250 A 0.006 VA with I En =1 A 0.12 VA with I En =5 A
Binary input circuits

Quantity Type Operative range Min activation voltage UDIGmin Max consumption, energized 2 optocoupler 24...265 V~/18 V 3 mA
3.3
OUTPUT CIRCUITS
Quantity Type of contacts Nominal current Nominal voltage/max switching voltage Breaking capacity: Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) Direct current (L/R = 40 ms) Alternating current ( = 0,4) Make Short duration current (0,5 s) Minimum switching load Life: Mechanical Electrical Minimum pulse width (K1tTR...K4tTR) 4 changeover (SPDT, type C) 8A 250 V~/400 V~ 50 W (K1, K2 trip) 30 W (K3, K4 signalling) 1250 VA 1000 W/VA 30 A 300 mW (5 V/ 5 mA) 106 operations 105 operations 0.01...0.50 s (step 0.01 s)
Output relays
Note 1 The different versions must be select on order Note 2 The residual current input is available on NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions
14 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 TECHNICAL DATA
3.4
MMI
Display LEDs Quantity ON/fail (green) Start (yellow) Trip (red) Trip I>, I>>, I>>> (red) Trip IE>, IE>> (red) 52a - Circuit Breaker closed (red) 52b - Circuit Breaker open (red) TCS - Trip Circuit Supervision (red) Keyboard 16x2 LCD backlight module 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 keys
3.5
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
Connection Baud rate Parity Protocol RJ10 19200 bps None Modbus RTU
Local port
Remote ports
RS485 Connection Baud rate Protocol[1] screw terminals 1200...57600 bps ModBusRTU IEC 60870-5-103
3.6
GENERAL SETTINGS
Relay nominal frequency fn Phase CT primary nominal current Inp [2] Residual CT primary nominal current IEnp [3] 50, 60 Hz 1 A...1250 A 1...99 A (step 1 A) 100...1250 A (step 5 A) 1 A...1000 A 1...99 A (step 1 A) 100...1000 A (step 5 A)
3.7
PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS
Phase overcurrent - 50/51

I> Element I > Curve type (I>Curve)[4] I CLP > Activation time (t CLP>) I > Reset time delay (t > RES) DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, B, C, ANSI/IEEEE MI, VI, EI 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s)
Note 1 The different versions must be select on order Note 2 The rated phase current settings doesnt concern the 50/51 protection elements; they must agree with nominal primary current for traditional CT inputs or dip-switch 50...1250 A for LPCT inputs for a right reading of the phase current primary values (Reading Direct). Note 3 The rated residual current settings doesnt concern the 50N/51N protection elements; they must agree with nominal primary current of the CT inputs for a right reading of the residual current primary values (Reading Direct). For the NA011#xxx0 and NA011#xxx1 versions (no residual current input circuit), the parameter is meaningless Note 4 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t: operate time I> inv : pickup value t>inv : operate time setting Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I > inv Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Equation is valid for 1.1 I/I>inv 20
TECHNICAL DATA
t = 0.14 t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] t = 13.5 t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1] t = 80 t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] t = t>inv {0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023} t = t>inv {3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098} t = t>inv {5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024}
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
15
Denite time 50/51 First threshold denite time (I > def )
I > def within CLP (ICLP>def )
I > def Operating time (t > def ) Inverse time[1] 50/51 First threshold inverse time (I >inv) I >inv within CLP (ICLP>inv) I >inv Operating time (t >inv)
0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 10.0...20.0 In (step 0.1 In) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 10.0...20.0 In (step 0.1 In) I > def 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s) 0.100...2.50 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...2.50 In (step 0.01 In) 0.100...10.00 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...10.00 In (step 0.01 In) I >inv 0.02...60.0 s 0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 10.0...20.0 In (step 0.1 In) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.100...20.0 In 0.100...0.999 In (step 0.001 In) 1.00...9.99 In (step 0.01 In) 10.0...20.0 In (step 0.1 In) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s) 0.03 s 0.95...0.98 0.04 s 0.03 s 4% 1% I n 5% or 10 ms
I>> Element ICLP >> Activation time (t CLP >>def ) I >> Reset time delay (t >> RES) Denite time 50/51 Second threshold denite time (I >> def )
I >> def within CLP (ICLP>def ) I >> def Operating time (t >> def ) I>>> Element ICLP >>> Activation time (t CLP >>>def ) I >>> Reset time delay (t >>> RES) Denite time 50/51 Third threshold denite time (I >>> def )
I >>> def Operating time (t >>> def ) Pickup time Dropout ratio Dropout time Overshoot time Pickup accuracy Operate time accuracy
Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): I-squared-t (I 2t = K): Electromechanical (EM): RECTIFIER (RI): t: operate time I> inv : pickup value t>inv : operate time setting Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I > inv Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Equation is valid for 1.1 I/I>inv 20 With I> inv pickup 2.5 I n , the upper limit is 50 I n
16
t = 0.14 t>inv / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] t = 13.5 t>inv / [(I/I>inv) - 1] t = 80 t>inv / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] t = t>inv {0.01 / [(I/I>inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023} t = t>inv {3.922 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.098} t = t>inv {5.64 / [(I/I>inv)2 - 1] + 0.024} t = 16 t>inv / (I/I>inv)2 t = 0.28 t>inv / [-0.236 (I/I>inv)-1+ 0.339] t = 2351 t>inv / [(I/I>inv)5.6- 1]
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
TECHNICAL DATA
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N

IE> Element IE > Curve type (IE > Curve) IECLP > Activation time (t ECLP>) IE > Reset time delay (t E > RES) Denite time 50N/51N First threshold denite time (IE > def ) IE > def within CLP (IECLP>def ) IE > def Operating time (t E > def ) Inverse time[1] 50N/51N First threshold inverse time (IE >inv) IE >inv Operating time (t E >inv) IE>> Element IECLP >> Activation time (t ECLP>>) IE >> Reset time delay (t E >> RES) Denite time 50N/51N Second threshold denite time (IE >> def ) IE >> def within CLP (IECLP>>def ) IE >> def Operating time (t E >> def ) Pickup time Dropout ratio Dropout time Overshoot time Pickup accuracy Operate time accuracy 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.005...5.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...5.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn) 0.005...5.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...5.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s) 0.03 s 0.95...0.98 0.04 s 0.03 s 4% 1% I En 5% or 10 ms 0.005...2.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...2.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn) 0.02...60.0 s 0.02...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...60.0 s (step 0.1 s) DEFINITE IEC/BS A, B, C ANSI/IEEE MI, VI, EI 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.00...100.0 s 0.00...9.99 s (step 0.01 s) 10.0...100.0 s (step 0.1 s) 0.005...5.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...5.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn) 0.005...5.00 IEn 0.005...0.999 IEn (step 0.001 IEn) 1.00...5.00 IEn (step 0.01 IEn) 0.03...10.00 s (step 0.01 s)
Breaker Failure
BF Time delay (tBF) Operate time accuracy 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.01 s) 0.10...10.00 s (step 0.05 s) 1.0...0.99 s (step 0.01 s) 5% or 10 ms
Note 1 Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): Electromechanical (EM): I E: residual current input t: operate time I E> inv : pickup value t E > inv : operate time setting Asymptotic reference value: 1.1 I E > Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Equation is valid for 1.1 I E/ I E> inv 20
TECHNICAL DATA
t = 0.14 t E>inv / [(I E/ I E> inv)0.02 - 1] t = 13.5 t E > inv / [(I E/I E> inv) - 1] t = 80 t E > inv / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1] t = t E > inv {0.01 / [(I E/I E> inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023} t = t E > inv {3.922 / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1] + 0.098} t = t E > inv {5.64 / [(I E/I E> inv)2 - 1] + 0.024} t = 0.28 t E > inv / [-0.236 (I E/I E> inv)-1+ 0.339]
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
17
3.8
CONTROL AND MONITORING

79 Function mode 79 Mode Number of delayed reclosures N .DAR Rapid reclosure dead time t rdt Slow reclosure dead time t sdt Reclaim time t r Slow reclosure fault discrimination time t d Rapid - Rapid+Slow 0...5 0.1...60 s 0.0...19.9 s step 0.1 s, 20..60 s step 1 s 1...200 s (step 1 s) 1...200 s (step 1 s) 1...10 s (step 1 s)
Automatic reclose (79)
Circuit Breaker monitoring

Circuit breaker diagnostic Diagnostic (CB check) 52a/52b - 52a - 52b
Oscillography (DFR)
Format Number of records Recording mode Sampling rate Set trigger: Pre-trigger time Trigger inputs Triggeroutputs Manual Trigger General Trigger general from start / trips Trigger from start / trips Set analog channels: Analog 1...Analog 4 Instantaneous currents value Phase currents Residual current Set digital channels: Inputs Outputs General trigger from start / trip IN1, IN2, IN3 K1...K4 General Start, General Trip i L1, i L2, i L3, i E I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 IE 0...63 T[1] [2] IN1, IN2, IN3 K1...K4 ThySetter Start, Trip Start I>, I>>, ...Trip I>... COMTRADE 2 circular 16 samples / power
3.9
MEASURES
RMS value of the fundamental component for phase currents RMS value of the fundamental component for residual current (I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 ) (I E )
Measures
Digital inputs
IN1 - 52b IN2 - 52a IN3 - 79 On - Off On - Off On - Off - external Trip
Automatic Reclose
79 Active Mode 79 Cycle State 79 Run 79 Residual time 79 Last event On - Off Reset - On - Off On - Off
Circuit Breaker
Position Open - Closed - Unknown
Note 1 - T = number of power cycles Exampile, with setting T=4 the pre-trigger is 80 ms with f = 50 Hz
18 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 TECHNICAL DATA
4
4.1 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
The following gure illustrates the basic structure of the relay.
MMI
LEDs LCD
RS232
RS485
1A/5A EEprom
DSP
INPUT MODULE
CTs
RTC
L1 L2
I L2
L3
50 A 100 A 200 A 400 A 800 A
CPU BOARD
RESET POWER FAIL
I L3
In=50...1250A
+5 V +10 V -10 V +24 V 0V
BINARY INPUTS POWER SUPPLY IN1 IN2 IN3 Input
RELAYS Uaux Output contacts
K1...K4
POWER SUPPLY BOARD

hw.ai
Printed boards hold the circuit components arranged according to a modular allocation of the main functions.
Power supply board

All the components necessary for conversion and stabilization functions are provided. Input range: 24...230 V. The circuit provides stabilized voltages of +10 V and -10 V, required for the analogue measurement, +24 V for relays and +5 V for supplying the digital circuits. The circuit board additionally comprises: INPUT CIRCUITS: Three binary input circuits, The logical input circuits and the block circuits include photo-couplers which provide for galvanic separation. OUTPUT CIRCUITS: One block output circuit (BLOUT 1), Four output relays (k1...K4).
FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 19
LPCTs CURRENT INPUTS
I L1
LPCT Setting
CPU board
This circuit board contains all the circuits necessary for performing the analogue and digital processing of the signals.
Analog processing
The following are envisaged: Anti aliasing lter circuits, . Amplier circuits for conditioning the input signals, Reference voltage adjustment circuits for the measurement A/D converter. The relays uses a DSP processor operating at 40 MHzThe input currents are sampled at a frequency of 64 samples per period by means of a dual conversion system which allows the attainment of information pertaining to polarity and amplitude with high resolution. The measurement criterion allows precise measurement of even those signals having a unidirectional component, such as transient currents with overlapping exponential, which typically appear during faults. The circuit board also houses the output relays with the corresponding command and control circuits, communication circuits, buttons, LCD display, LEDs and the key switch.
CPU
A 32 bit DSP is provided. The following are envisaged: Real Time Clock circuits with oscillator and super capacitor, RS232 communication port, RS485 communication port, Memories: Ram: high speed static memory Flash memory, EEprom memory: used for calibration data storage,
Input board Phase current inputs

Traditional CTs Three phase current inputs with secondary nominal currents independently selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches. Low power CTs Three phase current inputs with primary nominal currents independently selectable through DIPswitches and software.

Measured residual current One residual current input with secondary nominal current selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIPswitches. Calculated residual current Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents, measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors.
MMI (keyboard, LED and display)

The MMI module (Man Machine Interface) includes: An eight keys 8 keyboard, a backlight 16x2 LCD display, Eight signalling LEDs, RS232 communication port.
20
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
4.2
SOFTWARE DESCRIPTION
The program which handles operation of the Pro-N relays is made up of three fundamental elements shown in the following block diagram.
APPLICATION
DRIVERS
timers sampling KERNEL
Kernel
The kernel represents the nucleus of the system: it includes the processing functions closest to the electronic circuits; particularly the algorithms providing for the generation of the synchronisms (timers) for sampling the analogue signals and numerical processing. The software is structured with interrupts operating with various priority levels in a non pre-emptive task system. By means of Discrete Fourier Transform calculation, based on 64 samples/period, information is deduced in relation to the amplitude and phase of all the current measurements; these are constantly updated and at the disposal of all the protection and control application algorithms. In addition, the kernel manages a service communication protocol known as Basic Protocol (BP).
Drivers
The driver library contains all the specialised modules for the command and control functions which make up the connection ring between the kernel and the application. Examples of drivers include the Modbus communication and LCD display modules.
Application
The application contains all the elements which carry out the protection and control functions. The main modules are: - diagnostic function, - input management (logical inputs and block signal), - protective functions, - event recording, - output management (output relays, LEDs and block signals). Each element (Kernel, Drivers and Application) may, in turn, be split into modules:
Base protocol (kernel)

The module known as the Basic Protocol (BP) manages the service communication between the kernel and the other modules through the communication buses: - direct for internal functional call, - SPI over synchronous serial, - SCI over asynchronous serial. The activities which may be performed by means of BP include: - measurement conguration , - measurement reading, - measurement enabling.
Calibration (kernel)
Calibration is performed using the base protocol functions for coordinating the calibration and testing stages with the automatic testing equipment (ATE).
Communication (drivers)
The protective device implements the MODBUS RTU protocol for communicating via the RS232 interface with the ThySetter setting software and via the RS485 interface with the eld bus. All major codes according to the Modbus standard are envisaged; for a complete description and map of the addresses, please refer to the appendix mentioned further in this manual.
MMI (drivers)
This handles the menus, available both on the panel and by means of Modbus messages, which may be run from commands using the keyboard, LEDs and LCD display. MMI information is stored in EEPROM and may be loaded remotely by means of the basic protocol functions.
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
21
Data Base (application/drivers)

Using modular criteria, the database is structured in three sections: - RAM containing the volatile data, - REE and PAR containing the data recorded in non-volatile memory. Duplication of the data into two memory banks is envisaged with a continuous control system based on the cross checking of the consistency of the stored data. Modification of the calibration parameters is split into two stages; in particular, data undergoing modification is placed in temporary memory and subsequently confirmed permanently (Store command) or discarded (Clear command). Instead, the area identified as REE is set aside for recording data which does not require the Store command for storage, or date written directly by the application (e.g.: counters,...)
Self-test (application)
This function cyclically monitors the operation of the main hardware and software functions without affecting the process cycle with any signicant delays. In particular, the functions monitored are the following, - the reference voltage levels, - output relay coil continuity, - the program ow control by monitoring the execution times and stack area occupancy, - checking the pilot wires (accelerated logic system), - the consistency of the data in the REE and PAR blocks, duplicated in the EEPROM.
Development tools
For the development of the project, a CASE instrument has been developed, responsible for the optimized production of software code for the management of collaboration, the database and the MMI data and the Xml files used for communication. The automatic code generation criteria ensures the quality of the result in terms of the reusability, verifiability and maintainability of the software life cycle.
22
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
4.3
I/O DESCRIPTION
The following input are provided: Three phase current inputs for traditional CTs or LPCTs (Low Power Current Transformers). One residual current input available on NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions. The nominal currents are independently adjustable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches (CTs inputs).
Metering inputs
NA011
3 phase CT current inputs 3 phase LPCT current inputs
sensori.ai
The input circuits are dimensioned in order to withstand the currents which arise when a fault occurs, both in transient and steady state condition.
Signal processing
Various processing levels are involved: Acquisition (base level). Direct measures of physical channels (rst level). Calculated measures (second level). Derived (third level). The measures concerning a level are based on data worked out in the previous level. For each level the required resources concerning the priority for tasks (conditioning circuits, DSP) are on hand. ACQUISITION (base level) The input signals are sampled 24 times per power cycle
ACQUISITION
INSTANTANEOUS VALUES
acquisition.ai
- iL1...iL3 - iE
phase currents instantaneous value residual current instantaneous value
From the sampled quantities, several measures are computed for protection, monitoring and metering purposes. Samples are processed by means DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) algorithm and the phase and amplitude of fundamental are computed: Phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3
3 phase CT current inputs ACQUISITION
3 phase LPCT current inputs
i L1, i L2 , i L3
DFT
IL1, IL2 , IL3
(In)
IL1.ai
Residual current IE[1]

CT
ACQUISITION
iE
DFT
IE
(IEn)
IE.ai
Note 1 The residual current input is available on NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions; when input is unavailable, the residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents, measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors.
Fundamental component of the calculated residual current IE[1]

IL1 IL2 IL3
IEC.ai
IE = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
IE
(I En)
Use of measured values
PROTECTION
Phase overcurrent (50/51) Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) CONTROL & MONITORING Circuit Breaker Position (52b) Circuit Breaker Position (52a) Automatic Reclose (79) Diagnostic Protection states Input states Output states g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g
MEASURES
Phase current Residual current g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g
EVENT RECORDING
Event 0 Event 1 Event ... Event 99
FAULT RECORDING
Fault 0 Fault 1 Fault ... Fault 19
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Record 1 Record 2 g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g
Note 1 In versions with CT input, the residual current is available as a direct measure IE, while versions without residual current input the residual current is only available as a calculated measure
24 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS
IL1, IL2 , IL3 iE IE Binary input IN1 inary input IN2 , inary input IN3 Start (START) Relay K1...K4 Trip (TRIP) Relay K1...K4 Srart (START) LED Trip (TRIP) LED Trip (50/51) LED Trip (50N/51N) LED Trip (CB OPEN) LED Trip (CB CLOSED) LED 79 LED g g
i L1, i L2 , i L3
Binary inputs
Three binary inputs are available. The dry inputs must be powered with an external voltage, (usually the auxiliary power supply). The connections are shown in the schematic diagrams. Every input is customized for a dened function.
FUNCTION 52a (auxiliary CB contact) 52b (auxiliary CB contact) 79 (Automatic reclosing) Binary input
IN1
IN2 g
IN3
g g
52a and 52b

The CB position can be acquired by means of binary inputs connected to the auxiliary contacts: the information is used to acquire the CB position (open-closed-fault).
+UAUX
IN2
52
52a
52b
CB position CB diagnostic
IN1
-UAUX
Binary input allocation for CB state acquisition
79
Automatic reclosing enable/external trip . The exhaustive treatment of the 79 function is described in the concerning paragraph.
+UAUX
79 Enable or External TRIP

Binary input IN3
NA011
79 IN3 select Towards 79 logic
-UAUX
Automatic reclosing - 79
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
25
Output relays
Four output relays are available (K1...K4) with two changeover contacts (SPDT, type C):[1] K1 and K2 are trip relays. K3, K4 are signalling relays.[2] Each output relay may be programmed with following operating mode: Operation MODE (No latched, Latched). Logic (Energized/De-energized). To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (Minimum pulse width parameter). All parameters are available inside the Set \ Relays menu.
Input
No-latched operation
t TR Minimum pulse width
Latched operation
t
Output relay operation
Relay-operation-timers.ai
Any change to the settings can be affected at any time, also with the relay on duty, separately for each relay. Notes: When de-energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in rest condition if no trip command is in progress. When energized operating mode is set, the relay remains in operating condition if no trip command is in progress and the auxiliary supply is powered on. When no-latched operating mode is set (Kx Mode No-latched), the output relay reset at the end of the trip condition. To each output relay a programmable timer is matched (minimum pulse width operation). When latched operating mode is set Kx Mode Latched, the output relay doesnt reset at the end of the trip condition; it stays ON until a reset command is issued (RESET key, ThySetter or communication command). It is advisable to make sure that the output contact technical data are suitable for load (Nominal current, breaking capacity, make current, switching voltage,...). Matching every output relay to any protective element is freely programmable inside the Setpoints submenus according a tripping matrix structure.[3][4]
FUNCTION Self-test relay I> Start relays (Start I>) I> Trip relays (Trip I>) I>> Start relays (Start I>>) I>> Trip relays (Trip I>>) I>>> Start relays (Start I>>>) I>>> Trip relays (Trip I>>>) IE> Start relays (Start IE>) IE> Trip relays (Trip IE>) IE>> Start relays (Start IE>>) IE>> Trip relays (Trip IE>>) 79 Close 79 Run 79 Fail CB Close CB Open Self test CB Note 1 Schematic diagram are shown inside APPENDIX B1. Note 2 Reduced breaking capacity for the K3 and K4 relays compared to that of relay K1 and K2. Note 3 Matching of the output relay to the protective and control functions can be dened so that any collision from other function is avoided. All output relay are unassigned in the default setting. Note 4 Self test relay: it is advisable to plan the following settings: - Energized operating mode, - No-latched , in order that it stays ON for normal conditions and the other way round it goes OFF if any fault is detected and/or the auxiliary supply turns OFF.
RELAY
K1 K2 K3 K4
g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g
LED indicators
Eight LEDs are available. One green LED ON: if turned on it means that the device is properly working, if ashing the internal self-test function has detected an anomaly. One yellow LED START tagged for START of one or more protective elements. (I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>) One red LED TRIP tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements (I>, I>>, I>>>, IE>, IE>>). One red LED 1, latched, tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements I>, I>>, I>>> One red LED 2, latched, tagged for TRIP of one or more protective elements IE>, IE>> One red LED 3, no latched, tagged for binary input state visualization 52a (CB position) One red LED 4, no latched, tagged for binary input state visualization 52b (CB position) One red LED 5, no latched, tagged for binary input state visualization 79.
50N-51N (IE>, IE>> elements) 50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>> elements) CB OPEN (52a) CB CLOSED (52b) 79 (79 State)
Start Trip Open CB Close CB
FUNCTIONS Start I> Trip I> Start I>> Trip I>> Start I>>> Trip I>>> Start IE> Trip IE> Start IE>> Trip IE>> 79 State CB OPEN CB CLOSED
LED
START TRIP 1 2 3 4 5
g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g g
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
27
Communication interfaces
Two communication ports are provided: RS232 port on the front side for local communication (ThySetter). RS485 port on the rear side for bus communication.
RS232
A simple DIN to RJ adapter can be used; the L10041 cable can be supplied. The RS232 port has high priority compared with the RS485 port.
Female connector RJ10 Connector
Pin1
6 4 3 1 2 9 7 8 1 2 RXD 3 TXD 4 DTR 5 GND
L10041
serial-sch.ai
If RS232 port is not available on Personal Computer, an USB-RS232 converter must be employed.[1] The serial port is the simplest access for setting by means the ThySetter software.
RS485
Two protocol are implemented: ModBus RTU. Modbus is a serial communications protocol. It is a de facto standard communications protocol in industry, and is now the most commonly available means of connecting industrial electronic devices also inside electric utilities and substation. IEC 60870-5. The IEC 60870-5 suite of protocol is used for communications from master station to substation, as well within the substation; the IEC 60870-5-103 (Protection equipment) is available together the Modbus protocol on some version of Pro-n devices (code NA011#xCxx).
Note 1 After installation, the same communication port must be selected to dene the Thysetter parameters (typically COM4, COM5,...).
4.4
PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS Traditional CT inputs

Relay phase nominal current In This nominal value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary CTs nominal current. Dip-switches are located on the CPU board; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is described in the 6.4 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn paragraph. Relay residual nominal current IEn For NA011#xxx2 versions, the rated value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary nominal current of the residual CT. Dip-switch is located on the CPU board; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is described in the 6.4 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn paragraph. For NA011#xxx0 versions, the rated value is automatically set to the phase nominal current.[1]
Low Power CT inputs

Relay phase nominal current In This nominal value must be set by means dip-switch to 50 A to 1250 A, same as the primary nominal current of the protected plant. All settings of the current thresholds are referred to the rated current of the relay In, that corresponds to the primary value automatically set as just described. Dip-switches are located on the rear board; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is described in the 6.5 NOMINAL CURRENT In SETTING FOR LPCT paragraph. Relay residual nominal current IEn For NA011#xxx3 versions, the rated value must be set by means dip-switch to 1 A or 5 A, same as the secondary nominal current of the residual CT. Dip-switch is located on board of the CPU board; the exhaustive treatment of Dip setup is described in the 6.4 and 6.5 SETTING NOMINAL CURRENTS In AND IEn paragraph. For NA011#xxx1 versions, the rated value is automatically set to the phase nominal current.[1]
Settings
Inside the Set \ Base menu the following parameters can be set: Primary rated values (phase and residual), employed for measures relative to primary values. Measurements reading mode (Reading Direct or Relative). Phase CT primary current Inp This parameter affects the measure of the phase currents when the primary measurement reading mode is selected (Reading Direct). It must be programmed to the same value of the phase CT primary nominal current Traditional CTs) or to the value set for the LPCT inputs.
Example
52
NA011
LPCT Setting
KCT = 500A/5A=100
1A/5A
In
L1 L2
I L1...I L3
L3
50 A 100 A 200 A 400 A 800 A
In = 500 A In = 500 A In = 500 A
In=50...1250A
Es-In.ai
The phase CT primary current Inp must be set as: Inp = 500 A Residual CT primary current IEnp This parameter affects the measure of the residual current when the primary measurement reading mode is selected with traditional CTs inputs. It must be programmed to the same value of the residual CTs primary nominal current.
Example 1
52
NA011
1x
KTA = 100 A /1 A
IEn= 1 A
Es1-IEn.ai
The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 100 A
Note 1 The residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the three phase currents.
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 29
Example 2
52
NA011
KTA = 100A / 5A 3x IEn= 5 A

Es2-IEn.ai
The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 100 A
Example 3
52
NA011
LPCT Setting
KCT = 500A/5A=100
1A/5A
In
L1 L2
L3
In = 500 A In = 500 A In = 500 A
I L1...I L3
50 A 100 A 200 A 400 A 800 A In=50...1250A
Es3-In.ai
The residual CT primary current IEnp must be set as: IEnp = 500 A Measurement reading mode - With Reading Relative setting all measures are related to the nominal value, - With Reading Direct setting all measures are related to the primary value.
30
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
Phase overcurrent - 50/51 Preface

Three operation thresholds, independently adjustable (I >, I >>, I >>>) with adjustable delay (t >, t >>, t >>>). The rst one may be programmed with inverse time according the IEC 60255-3/BS142 standard. The second and third thresholds have a denite time characteristic. For the denite time thresholds a reset time can be set (t>>RES, t>>>RES) useful to reduce the clearing time for intermittent faults.
Operation and settings

Each phase fundamental frequency current is compared with the setting value. Currents above the associated pickup value are detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element it is restored. The rst threshold (I >) may be programmed with denite or inverse time according the following characteristic curves: Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 t >inv / [(I /I >inv)0.02 - 1] Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): t = 13.5 t >inv / [(I /I >inv) - 1] Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 t >inv / [(I /I >inv)2 - 1] Where: t: I >inv : t >inv : operate time threshold setting operate time setting
I > inv TRIP t >> def
t >>> def I > inv I >> def I >>> def
I
t-int-F50-51.ai
General operation time characteristic for the phase overcurrent elements - 50/51 For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies: Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I >inv Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 I /I >inv 20
For all denite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 40 In for traditional CT input versions or 12.5 kA (primary current) for LPCT input versions (e.g. 25 In with In = 500 A). All overcurrent elements can be enabled or disabled by setting the relative start and/or trip output to a selectable relay inside the Set \ Relays menu. The rst overcurrent element can be programmed with inverse time characteristic by setting the I>Curve parameter (DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C) available inside the Set \ 50/51 menu. An adjustable reset time delay is provided for second and third threshold (t >> RES, t >>> RES).
INPUT
t >> RES I>> Start t >> def I>> Trip

RESET
t >> RES
t >> RES
t >> def
I>> element phase overcurrent timers - 50/51
t
Timers-F50-51.ai
Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Each overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the BF enable parameters are set to Trip I> and/or Trip I>> inside the Set \ Breaker failure menu. If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may be blocked for an adjustable time interval (tCLP>, tCLP>> parameters adjustable inside the Set \ 50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element) \ Setpoints menu), starting from the circuit breaker closure. This operating mode may be select by setting On-Blocking the ICLP>, ICLP>> parameters. If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure. This operating mode (ON-Changing = ICLP>, ICLP>>) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tCLP>, tCLP>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ 50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( ICLP>def, ICLP>def, ICLP>>def) may be adjusted inside the Set \ 50/51 \ I> Element (I>> Element) \ Denite time (Inverse time) menus.
I >def I L1
I >inv
A =0 or OFF A =1
Start I> I>ST-K I>ST-L t >inv
(Pickup outside CLP) I L1 I > I C L P >def I C L P >inv (Pickup within CLP) I L1 I > 1 t >RES T 0 0 T T
RESET
I > Curve
t >RES
t >def t> 0 I>TR-K I>TR-L
I L2 I L3
Trip I>
t CLP> t CLP> T 0
Output t CLP>
A B C
CB-State
A = ON - Change setting B = OFF C = ON - Element blocking
ICLP>Mode Trip I> I>BF BF Enable (ON Enable) & I> BF towards BF logic
CB State
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
tCLP>
Output tCLP>
0.1 s
t HIGH THRESHOLD/ BLOCK LOW THRESHOLD/ UNBLOCK HIGH THRESHOLD/ BLOCK

Fun_50-51S1.ai
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - First element logic diagram (I>)
32
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
TRIPPING M ATRIX (LED+REL AYS)
I >>def I L1 I L1 I >> de f I C L P >>def (Pickup within CLP) I L1 I >> de f I L2 I L3 1 t >>RES 0 T (Pickup outside CLP)
A =0 or OFF A =1
Start I>> I>>ST-K I>>ST-L
t >>RES
t >>def t >>def T
RESET
I>>TR-K I>>TR-L Trip I>>
t C L P >>
CB-State
t CLP>> T 0
Output t CLP>>
A B C
ICLP>>Mode I>>BF
CB State CB OPEN CB CLOSED
Trip I>> BF Enable (ON Enable)
&
I>> BF
towards BF logic
CB OPEN
tCLP>>
Output tCLP>>
0.1 s

Fun_50-51S2.ai
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - Second element logic diagram (I>>)
I >>>def I L1 I L1 I >>> def I C L P >>def (Pickup within CLP) I L1 I >>> def I L2 I L3 1 t >>>RES 0 T (Pickup outside CLP)
A =0 or OFF A =1
Start I>> I>>>ST-K I>>>ST-L
t >>>RES
t >>>def t >>>def T
RESET
I>>>TR-K I>>>TR-L
Trip I>>>
t C L P >>>
CB-State
t CLP>>> T 0
Output t CLP>>>
A B C
ICLP>>>Mode Trip I>>> I>>>BF BF Enable (ON Enable) & I>>> BF towards BF logic
CB State
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
tCLP>>>
Output tCLP>>>
0.1 s

Fun_50-51S3.ai
Phase overcurrent (50/51) - third element logic diagram (I>>>)

FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010

33
Residual overcurrent - 50N/51N Preface

The residual current is: Measured for NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions from one residual current input with secondary nominal current selectable at 1 A or 5 A through DIP-switches or, Calculated for NA011#xxx0 and NA011#xxx1 versions by the vector sum of the three phase currents, measured by three 1A or 5A CTs or by three LPCT type sensors. Two operation thresholds, independently adjustable (IE >, IE >> with adjustable delay (t E >, t E >>) are available; the rst one (IE >) may be programmed with denite or inverse time according the IEC and ANSI/IEEE standard curves, the second threshold (IE >>) operates with independent time.

The residual fundamental frequency current) is compared with the setting value. Current above the associated pickup value is detected and a start is issued. After expiry of the associated operate time a trip command is issued; if instead the current drops below the threshold, the element it is restored. The rst threshold (IE >) may be programmed with denite or inverse time according the following characteristic curves: Standard Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type A or SIT): t = 0.14 t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv)0.02 - 1] t = 13.5 t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv) - 1] Very Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type B or VIT): Extremely Inverse Time (IEC 255-3/BS142 type C or EIT): t = 80 t E >inv / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1] t = t E >inv {0.01 / [(IE /IE >inv)0.02 - 1] + 0.023} Moderately Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type MI): Very Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type VI): t = t E >inv {3.922 / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1] + 0.098} Extremely Inverse (ANSI/IEEE type EI): t = t E >inv {5.64 / [(IE /IE >inv)2 - 1] + 0.024} where: t: operate time IE >: pickup value t E >inv : operate time setting
tE>
TRIP
t E >> IE> I E >>
IE
General operation time characteristic for the residual overcurrent elements - 50N/51N For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies: Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 IE > Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Range where the equation is valid:[1] 1.1 IE /IE >inv 20 If IE >inv pickup 2.5 IEn, the upper limit is 10 IEn For all denite time elements the upper limit for measuring is 10 IEn. All elements can be enabled or disabled by setting the relative start and/or trip output to a selectable relay inside the Set \ Relays menu. For each threshold a reset time can be set (t E>RES, t E>>RE ) useful to reduce the clearing time for intermittent faults.
INPUT t E>RES t E>RES t E>RES
IE> Start
t E> t E>
IE> Trip
RESET t
IE> element residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Timers
Timers-F50N-51N.ai
Note 1 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point
Each residual overcurrent element can produce the Breaker Failure output if the BF enable parameters are set to Trip IE> and/or Trip IE>> inside the Set \ Breaker failure menu. If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for element blocking, the selected threshold may be blocked for an adjustable time interval (tECLP>, tECLP>> parameters adjustable inside the Set \ 50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element) \ Setpoints menu), starting from the circuit breaker closure. This operating mode may be select by setting On-Blocking the IECLP>, IECLP>> parameters. If the CLP function (Cold Load Pick-up) is enabled for threshold change, the selected threshold may be changed for an adjustable time interval, starting from the circuit breaker closure. This operating mode (ON-Changing = IECLP>, IECLP>>) and the concerning operating time within the CLP (tECLP>, tECLP>>) may be adjusted inside the Set \ 50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element) \ Setpoints menus, whereas the operating thresholds within the CLP ( IECLP>def, IECLP>def ,IECLP>>def) may be adjusted inside the Set \ 50N/51N \ IE> Element (IE>> Element) \ Denite time (Inverse time) menus.
I E> def
State &
Start IE>
I E I E> def 1 I E> inv IE I E I E> inv

A =0 or OFF A =1
(Pickup outside CLP) t E>inv
State & I E> Curve t E>RES t >RES T (Pickup within CLP) I E I E CL P > 0 0 T T
t E>def t E> 0
RESET
I EC L P >def
I EC L P >inv
IE>TR-K IE>TR-L
Trip IE> t EC L P > t ECLP> T 0

Output t ECLP>
A B C
CB-State
IECLP>Mode Trip IE> IE>BF BF Enable (ON Enable) & IE> BF towards BF logic
CB State
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
tECLP>
Output tECLP>
0.1 s
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - First element logic diagram (IE>)
Fun_50N-51NS1.ai
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010

35
IE>ST-K IE>ST-L
Start IE>> IE>>ST-K IE>>ST-L (Pickup outside CLP) I E I E>> def IE I EC L P >>def
A =0 or OFF A =1
t E>RES t >RES 0 T
t E>>def t E>> T
RESET
IE>>TR-K IE>>TR-L
(Pickup within CLP) I E I ECLP >>
Trip IE>> t EC L P >>

CB-State
t ECLP>> T 0
Output t ECLP>>
A B C
IECLP>>Mode Trip IE>> IE>>BF BF Enable (ON Enable) & IE>> BF towards BF logic
CB State
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
tECLP>>
Output tECLP>>
0.1 s

Fun_50N-51NS2.ai
Residual overcurrent (50N/51N) - Second element logic diagram (IE>>)
36
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
I E>> def
Breaker failure - BF Preface

When the protection issues a trip command but, because an anomaly, the circuit breaker cannot open, the breaker failure protection issues a back-up trip command to trip adjacent circuit breakers. The breaker failure function may be started by internal protective function if associated with BF.

The starting of the timer occurs if both the following conditions are lled: A) Start and trip of internal protective elements (trip of elements matched with BF protection); B) The CB is closed (the CB state may be acquired by means one or two binary inputs connected to the auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b). If both conditions are held along the set operate time t BF, the BF element trips at deadline, vice versa the timer is cleared and the function is restored. To the purpose to restore the BF element as quickly as possible, with start of the same protection (see A condition), additionally to the trip of some internal protections, their starts are required (start reset is faster than trip reset). The element may be enabled or disabled by setting OFF, Trip I>, trip I>>, trip IE> or trip IE>> the BF Enable parameter.
BF Enable t BF
52a 52b Tr ip Tr ip B F S t ar t B F
General logic diagram of the breaker failure element - BF The t BF and BF Enable parameters are available inside the Set \ Breaker failure-BF menu.
all-FBF.ai
BF start from Circuit breaker
One or two binary inputs are designed for acquire the 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts. The CB check parameter is available inside the Set \ Circuit breaker menu, the 52a, 52b and 52a/52b function is assigned to the selected binary inputs.
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
37
4.5
CONTROL AND MONITORING
Circuit breaker supervision Preface

By means 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts, the CB position is acquired; based on this information a Open and/or Close can be sent safely issued by user. To activate the Auto-reclose function the CB state acquisition must be enabled. The wrong congruity of the auxiliary contact is detected in run time mode (52a and 52b), by means of binary inputs; any failure is detect and stored inside the 100 events (Data Logger).
+UAUX
IN2
CB check 52a ON/OFF

REL AYS TRIPPING M ATRIX LED 3, 4
52
52a
52b =1
IN1
-UAUX
Logic diagram concerning the Circuit Breaker monitoring
52b ON/OFF
Fun-CB-position.ai

52a is the auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the same position as the breaker (52a open = CB open). It must be assigned to the IN2 binary input. 52b is the auxiliary contact in the breaker that is in the opposite position as the breaker (52b open = CB closed)). It must be assigned to the IN1 binary input. The circuit breaker position can be veried by one or two logic inputs, the parameter is available within the Set \ Circuit breaker menu: CB check = 52a/52b: both binary input must be wired to 52a and 52b auxiliary contacts CB check = 52a: the binary input IN2 must be wired to 52a CB check = 52b: the binary input IN1 must be wired to 52b. With 52a/52b setting, if an inconsistency is veried (eg, IN1 and IN2 are both ON or both OFF) an alarm message is displayed (Position Alarm ), the LED 3 and 4 blinks and the output relay Self Test CB switches. With 52a or 52b setting, no inconsistency may be detected
Circuit breaker commands

By means of the (Open) and (Close) keys the circuit breaker command may be issued. The committed output relays must be enabled inside the Set \ Relays menu.
38
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
Automatic reclosure - 79 Preface

The automatic reclosure function is well-used on overhead lines (when faults are self-extinguish after tripping of protection relays). To activate the Auto-reclose function the CB state acquisition must be enabled!
Operation and settings[1]

The following sequences may be selected: Rapid reclosure, Rapid reclosure + slow reclosure Rapid reclosure + slow reclosure followed by one or more delayed reclosures (1...5). Starting of the automatic reclosing function can be raised by internal protective elements or externally by means binary input signals (eg: external protection device contacts or operating switches). The following logics may be set (binary input IN3 allocation): External trip; activation command (pulse), Enabling; activation command (On = Enable). The element may be enabled or disabled by setting ON the 79 Enable parameter available inside the Set \ AutoReclose-79 menu.
79 Enable C B check
79 Mode
N.DAR
t rdt
t sdt
tr
td
79 MC-td-EN
79 MO-RES
5 2 a, 5 2 b, 5 2 a& 5 2 b IN 3 selec t 7 9 E nable 7 9 Tr igger 79
7 9 - C lose 7 9 - Run 7 9 - F ail
Trip I> Trip I> & Trip I>> Trip I>> & Trip I>> Trip I>> Trip IE> Trip IE> & Trip IE>> Trip IE>> Tr ip E X T Tr ip P ro t E x t & Trip EXT & & 1
General logic diagram of the automatic reclose function - 79 The following output functions may be coupled to the output relays: CB reclosing command (79 Close); it is indispensable for the auto reclosure function. Cycle in progress (79 Run). Reclosure fail (79 Fail). The following timers are provided: Rapid reclosure dead time trdt Slow reclosure dead time tsdt tr Reclaim time td Slow reclosure fault discrimination time Rapid reclosure dead time (trdt )[2] It is the time interval from the CB opening command and the CB reclosing command.
Note 1 The CB state acquisition must be enabled; if CB check = None the 79 function is disabled
all-F79.ai
Note 2 The reclosing waiting time is calculated from the rst event that is detected between the reset of the trip element and the open state acquisition of the circuit breaker
The setting time for the rapid reclosure is a compromise from the time required for the arc extinction on the fault location and the max allowable out of service time of the line. The parameter must be adjusted on the basis of the extension and grid voltage. The minimum value should allow the arc deionization and the insulation restoring in order to comply with the mechanical characteristics of the circuit breaker and the residual arc extinction. Slow reclosure dead time (tsdt )[1] It is the time interval from the failed fast reclosure and the start of slow reclosure sequence. The setting time for the waiting time is a function of the mechanical characteristics of the circuit breaker (data must be supplied by manufacturer). For newest circuit breakers typical values are 60 s and 180 s for oldest circuit breakers. Reclaim time (tr) It is the time interval following the initiation of reclosure command. If no trip operation arises within the reclaim time the reclosing operation is regarded as successful and the device is ready for a new sequence. If any trip arises within the reclaim time the cycle goes on with sequence depending from the setting mode. Slow reclosure fault discrimination time (td). If any trip arises within the time interval td, the cycle goes off and the failed reclosure is issued.
Rapid reclosing
With Rapid-reclose setting (79 Mode = Rapid), if no faults (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time (Successful rapid reclosure), after the reclaim time the system comes back to reset; a new trip starts a rapid reclosing sequence again. Any trip within the tr time interval causes a blocking of the sequence and a failed reclosure signal is issued (unsuccessful rapid reclosure);
CB State
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
trdt tr
Reclaim timer
Successfully rapid reclosure
t
79-diafram.ai
Unsuccessful rapid reclosure; new fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time. The automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed reclosure command is issued. After the reclaim time, following a closed CB condition without any faults, the system comes back to reset.
CB State
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
trdt tr tr
Reclaim timer
Failed reclosure
t
Unsuccessful rapid reclosure
79RF-diafram.ai
Note 1 The reclosing waiting time is calculated from the rst event that is detected between the reset of the trip element and the open state acquisition of the circuit breaker
Rapid +Slow reclosing
With Rapid+Slow reclose setting (79 Mode = Rapid+Slow) if a fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time, after the slow reclosure dead time (tsdt ) a slow reclosure is operated. Because no trip occurs within the reclaim time the system comes back to reset; any new trip starts a rapid + slow reclosing sequence again (Successful rapid + slow reclosure).
CB State
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
trdt tr
tsdt tr
Reclaim timer
Discrimination timer td
t
79RL-diafram.ai
Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent successfully slow reclosure
Conversely if a new fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time and the next slow reclosure is issued with fault within the slow reclosure fault discrimination time td the automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed reclosure command is issued (unsuccessful rapid + slow reclosure).
CB CLOSED
CB State
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
CB OPEN
trdt tr
tsdt tr
Reclaim timer
Discrimination timer td Failed reclosure

t
Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent slow reclosure still over a fault
79RLF-diafram.ai
Rapid + slow reclosures and subsequent delayed reclosures
With Rapid+Slow reclose setting (79 Mode = Rapid+Slow) and more than zero reclosures are enabled (79N.DAR = 1...5) if a fault (CB opening command) occurs within the reclaim time, after the slow reclosure dead time (tsdt ) a slow reclosure is operated on fault detected later than td1 but within the reclaim time tr ; once the reclaim time has elapsed, the delayed reclosing is issued.
CB OPEN
CB State
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
CB CLOSED
trdt tr
tsdt tr tr
Reclaim timer
Discrimination timer td Failed reclosure

t
td
Rapid reclosure over a fault and subsequent slow and delayed reclosures
FUNCTION CHARACTERISTICS NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
79RLM-diafram.ai
41
The delayed reclosure starts the timer td (reclosure fault discrimination time); at the same time the reclaim timer tr is started; if no more trip within tr, once the reclaim time has elapsed, the system comes back to reset. (Successful rapid + slow + delayed reclosures). Conversely, if a further trip within td arises, the automatic reclosing system is blocked and a failed reclosure command is issued. Following trips after the td up to ve reclosures may be programmed by means the N.DAR parameter available inside the Set \ Auto-reclose - 79 menu.
CB manual CLOSE
The intentional CB closing command start the reclaim (tr) and Manual close fault discrimination (td) timers if the manual close discrimination timer is enabled (79-MC-td-EN=ON).
CB State
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN CB CLOSED CB OPEN CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
trdt tr
Reclaim timer
CB manual close
79-MC-td-EN
t
CB manual close command
MC-tdEN-diagram.ai
CB manual OPEN
The intentional CB opening command reset the reclaim (tr) if the Reset cycle from manual open parameter is enabled (79-MO-RES=ON).
CB State
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
CB CLOSED
CB OPEN
trdt tr
trdt tr
Reclaim timer
CB manual open
79-MO-RES
t
Reset cycle from CB manual open command
MO-RES-diagram.ai
42
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
Test
The test function allows the checking of each 50-51 and 50N-51N protection function threshold by means of the introduction of a dummy signal, with twice the setting threshold value and duration as to cause the start and/or tripping of the threshold itself, into the input circuit stages of the relay. This test does not include checking the system measuring transformers and the relevant connections to the digital protection relay. Having activated the test function mode, the threshold relating to the protective function to be checked and the relevant test method must be selected. The latter may or may not include changing the status of the output relays assigned as the selected threshold start and /or trip. For the thresholds relating to protective functions 50 and 51 the dummy signal is applied simultaneously over all phases. Example, with setting t>inv = 1 s, the operate time for the rst element 50/51is: 10 s with IEC/BS A characteristic 13.5 s with IEC/BS B characteristic 26.6 s with IEC/BS C characteristic In cases involving selection of the test mode without any changes in the status of the output relays (blank Testing), upon tripping of the selected threshold, the corresponding LED is lit and the test outcome recorded as the most recent event. The test condition is shown by means of the blinking green LED ON.[1] Test I> led Test I>> led Test I>>> led Test IE> led Test IE>> led In cases involving selection of the test mode with changes in the status of the output relays, at the start and/or tripping of the selected threshold the corresponding programmed output relay is switched, the corresponding LED lit and the outcome recorded as the most recent event. The test condition is shown by means of the blinking green ON.[2] Test I> full Test I>> full Test I>>> full Test IE> full Test IE>> full For both modes the test may be ended by means of the Test off command; in any case they are ended after 2 minutes.
Oscillography Set trigger

Following parameters, available inside the Oscillography \ Setting menu, are user-programmable: Pre-trigger time.
Trigger 0...63 T pre-trigger post-trigger Time
trigger.ai
record length
With setting of the Trigger parameter General start or General trip the recording starts with state change of any protection elements. With setting of the Trigger parameter Manual the recording starts with manual command (ThySetter). With setting of the Trigger parameter K1...K4 the recording starts with state change of the selected output relay. With setting of the Trigger parameter IN1, IN2, IN3 he recording starts with state change of any binary input. With setting of the rigger aux parameter Start I>, Start I>>, Start I>>>,.... the recording starts with state change of start or trip of the selected protection element.
Set measured channels

The analog measures ((iL1, iL2 , iL3 , iE ), IL1, IL2 , IL3 , IE ) may be select inside the Oscillography \ Setting \ Analog channel 1...4 menu. Everyone of four analog channel may be associated to one of the selected measures.
Set digital channels

The desired I/O signals may be select inside the Oscillography \ Setting \ Digital channels menu (General start, General trip, K1... K4, , IN1, IN2, IN3).
Note 1 The test is performed (LED) even if the concerning element is assigned to almost one output relay Note 2 The test is performed (LED & relays) even if the concerning element is assigned to almost one output relay
5
Measures
M E A S U R E S , L O G I C S TAT E S A N D C O U N T E R S
RMS value of fundamental component for phase currents (I L1, I L 2 , I L 3 ) RMS value of fundamental component for measured residual current (I E )
Circuit breaker
The CB and 79 states are provided Position and the binary inputs state: IN1-52b IN2-52a IN3-79 Open - Closed - Unknown On/Off On/Off On/Off
Counters
For every protective element and control function several counters are available; the partial counters can be cleared by the user. Every partial counter is reset to zero when ten thousand count is passed. All partial counters can be cleared by means a single command; for this purpose the Reset counters command must be issued available inside the Reset menu. Counter ST I> (start I> element) Counter ST I>> (start I>> element) Counter ST I>>> (start I>>> element) Counter ST IE> (start IE> element) Counter ST IE>> (start IE>> element) Counter TR I> (trip I> element) Counter TR I>> (trip I>> element) Counter TR I>>> (trip I>>> element) Counter TR IE> (trip IE> element) Counter TR IE>> (trip IE>> element) Counter 79 RR (Rapid reclosures) Counter 79 RL (Slow reclosures) Counter 79 RM (Delayed reclosures) Counter 79 FR P (Failed reclosures) Counter 79 FR E (Failed reclosures) Counter 79 FR X (Failed reclosures)
Fault recording - SFR

Recording[1] is triggered by: Relay activation (OFF-ON) External trigger (binary input) programmed as Fault trigger Element start or trip Twenty events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer.[2] Following information are stored in every record: Read \ Faults \ Info menu Faults stored[3] Last fault Read \ Faults \ Fault menu Fault number (F-Number) Fault Cause (F-Cause) Fault Phases (F-Phases) Phase currents (F-IL1, F-IL2, F-IL3) Residual current IEr F-IE) Date and time (F-Year) Date and time (F-Year) Date and time (F-Month) ... Date and time (F-Millisecond) The fault log may be erased by means of the command available inside the Read \ Faults \ Reset menu.
Event recording - Events

Recording is triggered by: Power up and/or Power down. Element start or trip. Binary input switch (OFF-ON or ON-OFF). Setting modify. Control function trip (CB switch OFF-ON or ON-OFF). One hundred events are recorded into a circular FIFO (First In, First Out) buffer (Read \ Events \ Info
Note 1 Data concerning the twenty events are stored into non volatile memory; they are held in spite of power down Note 2 Fault 0 is the newest event, while the Fault 19 is the oldest event Note 3 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThySetter
44 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
menu).[1] Following information are stored in every record: Read \ Events \ Info menu Event stored [2] Last Event Read \ Event \ Event menu Event number (E-Number) Event Cause (E-Cause) Date and time (E-Year) Date and time (E-Year) Date and time (E-Month) ... Date and time (E-Millisecond)
Info
Code NA011-a Serial ...... (Serial number) Firmware release ...... (eg: 2.00) Nominal freq. (eg: 50 or 60 Hz) Firmware release ...... (ef: 1.00) Protocol release ...... (eg: 1.00)
Protections trip
Protections trip (eg: Trip I>>)
Self-test
Following information are available (Read \ Self test \ Info menu): Type Self-test cause Self-test latch The relay self-test function classies relay operational anomalies according to three levels: - MINOR ANOMALY: The device continues to function within the possible limits with the protective devices activated; - MAJOR ANOMALY: Operation of the device may be corrected by the operator by resetting the initial (default) conguration and hence the desired settings; - FATAL ANOMALY: All logic and protective functions are inoperative and the relay must be returned to the factory. The internal self-test function is capable of detecting the following anomalies and indicating them by means of messages: - defective auxiliary power supply (FATAL ANOMALY); - output relay coil breakage (FATAL ANOMALY); - alteration of the calibration data stored in EEPROM memory (FATAL ANOMALY); - alteration of the parameters (threshold setting, times, relays etc.) in EEPROM memory (MAJOR ANOMALY); - alteration of the data (counters, records, ...etc.) in EEPROM memory (FATAL ANOMALY); Upon detection of at least one of the above mentioned anomalies, the output relay programmed for Self-test is switched and the information is recorded (latched).
Oscillography - DFR[3]
Upon programmable trigger, the fault records are recorded in COMTRADE format d; the sampled measures (64 sample per cycle) are stored in a circular shift memory buffer. The fault record are self-triggered; they are stored in sequential order up the allocated memory is used up after which the oldest memory is overwritten. An operating procedure example for the digital fault recording is illustrated inside the ThySetter section. Following parameters are user-programmable:[4] Pre-trigger time (0...63 T where T = number of power cycles; Example, with settings T=4 the pre-trigger duration is 80 ms with f = 50 Hz).
Trigger 0...63 T pre-trigger post-trigger Time
trigger.ai
record length
Selected sampled quantities.

Note 1 The newest event data are stored inside the event addressed by the Last event parameter (1...100) Note 2 Counter is updated at any new record; it may be cleared by means ThySetter Note 3 The Programmable Logic Controller requires a licence; to purchase it please contact Thytronic. Note 4 As all settings, the settings take effect only after sending the Store command
MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 45
Analog channels (1...4) allocation. Digital channels allocation (output relay and/or binary inputs). Trigger setup; the information storage starts when a state transition on the selected signal occurs. (protective element start and/or trip, output relay and/or binary input switching).
Example 1
With the following setting: Analog channel 1: Analog channel 2: Analog channel 3: Analog channel 4: Digital channel: Pre-trigger: iL1 iL2 iL3 iL4 K1 1 T (20 ms)
the stored record length of the two records with f = 50 Hz is 240 ms

Trigger 20 ms 1T 240 ms Time
trigger.ai
Example 2
With the following setting: Analog channel 1: Analog channel 2: Analog channel 3: Analog channel 4: Digital channel: Pre-trigger: iL1 K1 1 T (20 ms)
the stored record length of the two records with f = 50 Hz is 640 ms
Oscillographic recorder example
oscillo-phase.ai
46
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
MEASURES, LOGIC STATES AND COUNTERS
6
6.1 PACKAGING
I N S TA L L AT I O N
Packaging consists of a paperboard packaging guaranteeing adequate protection for transport and storage under normal environmental conditions. The Pro-N protection relays must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative humidity should not cause condensation or formation of frost. It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, especially in extreme climatic conditions. It is recommended that the packaging not be disposed of into the environment, but kept in case the relay should be moved at some later time.
6.2
MOUNTING
The devices are housed inside metal cases suitable assembly: Flush mounting Rack9.
Flush mounting
The xed case, tted with special fastening brackets, is mounted on the front of electric control board, previously drilled as indicated in the drawing. In case of side-by-side mounting of several relays the minimum drilling distance is determined by the front dimensions indicated in the overall dimensions drawing, increased by 3 mm, to ensure an adequate tolerance and gasket space between adjacent relays. The depth dimension, as indicated in the drawing, must be increased by as much as needed to allow room for the wiring.
107
75
30
101
D1
102.5 0.3 70
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9
C1
TX C3 C4 B1
177
171 149
ON
START TRIP
A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22
B4 B5 C5 C6 B6 B7 B8
C7
C8
E1
161 154
A10 A11
B2 B3
N.4 fori 3.5
Remove the upper tile and open the little door to access the fastening screws.
Removing tie to access the fastening screws
Remove-tile.ai
INSTALLATION
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
47
The xed case is fastened by means of four screws onto the panel as indicated in the drawing.
Flush-mount1.ai
Rack mounting
For mounting inside a standardized 19-inch system (EIA 310-D, IEC 60297 and DIN 41494 SC48D), the MAR adapter is required (available on request).
482.6 465
177 (4U) 101.6
ON
START TRIP
ON
START TRIP
ON
START TRIP
ON
START TRIP
Rack mounting
Rack-mount.ai
To allow opening of the keyboard door a one unit space must be provided when several rack are overlapping mounted.
Rack mounting
Rack-mount1.ai
48
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
INSTALLATION
6.3
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Electrical connections should be made by referring to the connection diagram; in cases where certain of the circuits (communication, block, or others) are not used, the relevant connections must remain open. Examples of connection diagrams are reported on Appendix to this manual.
CAUTION Devices must be installed by qualied personnel only. No liability is accepted from Thytronic due to improper use.
For the A1...A22 connections and (RS485), screw terminals with following characteristics are available: Nominal cross section: 0.14...2.5 mm2 (AWG 26...16) for single conductor da 0.14 a 0.75 mm2 for two conductors with same cross section Tightening torque: 0.5-0.6 Nm Stripping length: 8 mm The connections to the current signal inputs C1...C8 can be made by ring lugs suitable for M4 screws and an insulating panel covering the terminals may be mounted for safety purposes.
D1
K1
K2
K3
K4
IN1 IN2 IN3
UAUX
A21 A22
1 2 3
F1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20
C1
TX C3 C4 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 C5 C6 B6 B7 B8
C7
C8
3
RS485
1 2
A+ B-
E1
Amperometric inputs from traditional CTs

D1
K3
K1
K2
K4
IN1 IN2 IN3
UAUX
A21 A22
1 2 3
E1
INSTALLATION
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20
L1
LPCT Setting
L2
1 2 3 4 5
RX
F2 F3 F4 F5
Amperometric inputs from LPCTs
L3
1 2 3 4 5
TX
1 2 3 4 5
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
EX. In = 300A (100+200)
50 100 200 400 800
B7 B8
C7
C8
3
RS485
A+ B-
49
Core balanced CT[1]

Proper installation is shown in g. 1a and 1b. The current balance transformer, when used for measuring residual current, must be crossed in the same direction by all active conductors and hence, also by the neutral conductor if distributed, with the exception of the ground connection protective conductor. The drawing below shows cases of assembly of the toroid on unscreened and screened cables; prior to proceeding with assembly, it is necessary to check that there are no screen-to-ground connections upstream of the sensor.
Source
Source
Insulated cables
Shielded cables
Armoring
Armoring
Load Fig. 1a
Current balanced transformer
Load Fig. 1b
Toroide.ai
In order to ensure a linear response from the sensor, the cables must be positioned in the centre of the transformer so that the magnetic effect of the three cables is perfectly compensated in the absence of residual current (Fig.2a). Hence, the assembly indicated in the drawing of g.2b, in which phase L3 causes local magnetic saturation whereby the vectorial sum of the three currents would be non-null, should be avoided. The same considerations also apply when the sensor is positioned near bends in the cabling. It is recommended that the transformer be placed away from bends in the conductors). The use of a balance transformer with an inside diameter about twice the diameter of the the cable going through it is recommended.
L1
L1 L3
L2
L3
L2
Fig. 2a
Current balanced transformer
Fig. 2b
Fig. 2c
Toroide.ai
Note 1 Use of a toroid is recommended when high sensitivity is required (NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions
50 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 INSTALLATION
Earth
A protective ground connection is required, which must be connected to the suitable screw with a separate lead of at least 2.5 mm2; the connection from A21 or a22 terminal and the ground srew is also required.[1]
Earthing
rear.ai
CT amperometric inputs
The amperometric input circuits are assembled inside the xed module, so no short circuit on the secondary CTs must be provided when the removable module is pulled out In the event of case replacement, some camps must be provided externally to shorting the secondary CTs circuits to avoid secondary open circuit of CTs that may endanger equipment or people.
CAUTION
In case of disconnection CT wiring to the case, pay attention must to do not open live circuits. When making the current connections, attention must be paid to not exceeding the performance of the line current transformers. To be exact, the total load, constituted by the protective relay, any other protective relays or measuring instruments and the resistance of the connections, must not exceed the line CT performance. In particular, consumption of the relay input circuit must not exceed 0.2 VA while the load (expressed in VA) constituted by the conductors is given by: 0.018 L In 2 / S where: L the overall length, expressed in m, of the two conductors in relation to each phase; In nominal current of the line CT expressed in A; S cross sectional area of the current conductors expressed in mm2. It is recommended that cabling of a suitable thickness be used in order to limit wear of the CT secondary circuits.
LPCT amperometric inputs

The amperometric input are designed for Low Power Current Transformer with 100 A - 22.5 mv ratio. Connections to NA011 device must be carried out by means RJ45 plugs, forming a part of the Transformer.[2]
Note 1 The A21 and A22 terminal are link together inside the relay Nota 2 For technical data please call Thytronic.
INSTALLATION NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 51
Binary inputs
The dry input circuits, despite being galvanically isolated, must preferably be supplied with the same auxiliary voltage of the control panel. The inputs are polarity free with wide voltage range.
+UAUX
A B A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 IN3 IN2 IN1
-UAUX
The optocupled inputs are immune to transitory interferences, however the following recommendation must be considered in high disturbed environments: Position input wiring away from high energy sources. Use shielded cables with ground connection on only one end (preferably at the relay side.
Output relays
Four output relays are available (SPDT, type C): K1 and K2 (trip relays). K3 e K4 (signalling relays). It is advisable to verify that the technical characteristic of the contacts be suitable for the applied load (about current, nominal voltage, make and break current , etc..). All contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference
RS232 port
The link from PC and NA10 serial port must be established by means a L10041 cable.
USB-RS232 converter Female connector RJ10 Connector

Pin1
4 3 1 2 9 7 8 1 6 2 RXD 3 TXD 4 DTR 5 GND
L10041
(if none RS232 PC port is available)

serial1-sch.ai
When no RS232 port is available on Personal Computer, a suitable USB to RS232 converter must be employed. After installation, the same communication port must be selected to dene the Thysetter parameters (typically COM4, COM5,...).
52
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
INSTALLATION
RS485 port
RS485 communication circuit connections must be made using screened twisted pair cable observing the polarities; screening must only be connected to the end terminating at the RS485 interface circuit pertaining to the monitoring unit. It is recommended to terminate the line at the extremities of the same; this must be performed on the RS485 line control unit and on the NA011 device placed at the furthest point connecting the specially provided resistor; termination can be made by means a jumper between the E1-E2 terminals. Termination resistors allow adjusting the impedance of the line, reducing the inuence of the inductive components of the same, which might compromise good communication.
Pro-N
K1
NA011
A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
IE OUTPUT RELAYS I L1
K2
K3 K4 K5 K6
I L2
I L3
CURRENT INPUTS
1
RS485
BA+
RS485
BA+
2 3
E1
ETHERNET
A1 A2
UAUX
D1
THYBUS
SUPERVISION UNIT
E1
BLOCK IN
RS485 120
BLOCK OUT
BA+
A17 A18
BLOUTBLOUT+
A15 A16
A20 A21 A22
IN1 IN2
BINARY INPUTS
A19
FRONT PANEL RS232
RS485-wiring.ai
INSTALLATION
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
53
6.4
NOMINAL CURRENT I n AND I En SETTINGS

Factory default settings: Nominal phase current In: 5 A (NA011#xxx0 and NA011#xxx2 versions) Nominal residual current IEn: 1 A (NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions) To modify settings, the dip-switches placed on the front board must be changed (the case must be open).
CAUTION
Turn off power supply before opening the case. The following operations must be performed: Remove the auxiliary supply Remove the upper tile and open the little door to access the fastening screws.
Removing tie to access the fastening screws
Remove-tile.ai
Unscrew gradually back to back the four fastening screw in order avoid loss of the internal washer. Unmounting of the case from the switchboard is not needed. Rotate the MMI module with care to not disconnect the at cable.
Avoid touching the printed circuit and connections[1],
Note 1 There are components present which are sensitive to electrostatic discharge. When the module is removed, it is important to pay particular attention to avoid any accidental contact with the internal components. In order to avoid the static electricity accumulated in the human body from causing damage, it is recommended to observe the following precautions: - eliminate any potential differences between the human body and the device by touching the metallic case, - avoid touching the printed circuit and connections (tracks, component terminals), - avoid handing the device to others, - set the programming DIPs by using antistatic tools.
54 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 INSTALLATION
Set the dip-switches on the top of the circuit board in accordance with the drawing shown below,.
Dip-swithes position Move dip-switches according the following layout.[1]
IE IL3 IL2 IL1
1A 5A
Default settings: - In =5 A - IEn =1 A
ON
4 3 2 1
IE IL3 IL2 IL1
1A 5A
Settings: - In =1 A - IEn =1 A
ON
4 3 2 1
IE IL3 IL2 IL1
1A 5A
ON
4 3 2 1
IE IL3 IL2 IL1
1A 5A
ON
4 3 2 1
Dip-switch localization concerning the nominal current setting inside the front board
Note1 On NA011#xxx0 and NA011#xxx1 versions (without residual input circuit), the IE setting is not meaningful. Place switches 1 ... 4 according to the number on the printed circuit board (not considering the numbers on the component)
INSTALLATION NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 55
6.5
NOMINAL CURRENT I n SETTING FOR LPCT

Factory default settings: Primary nominal phase current In: 300 A Nominal residual current IEn: 1 A (NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions as shown in the previous pages) To modify the phase rated currents, the dip-switches placed on the rear panel must be set.
D1
L1
LPCT Setting
L2
1 2 3 4 5
F1 RX F2 F3 F4 F5
50 100 200 400 800
L3
1 2 3 4 5
TX
1 2 3 4 5
B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
EX. In = 300A (100+200)
In = 300 A (100 + 200) Factory default setting In = 50 A Minimum setting In = 1250 A (800 + 400 + 50) Maximum setting
50 100 200 400 800
B7 B8
C7
C8
3 2
configuration is not allowed
E1
56
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
INSTALLATION
6.6
LED ALLOCATION
Eight indicator LEDs and six keys are available on the front panel:
50N-51N (IE>, IE>>) 50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>>)
CB OPEN (52a) CB CLOSED (52b) 79
Start Trip CB Open CB Close
6.7
FINAL OPERATIONS
Before energizing the electric board, it is advisable to check that: The auxiliary voltage in the panel falls within the operative range of relays. The rated current of the line CTs corresponds to the settings of relay. All wirings are correct. All screws are tightly screwed.
INSTALLATION
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
57
PROGRAMMING AND SETTINGS

All relay programming and adjustment operations may be performed through MMI (keyboard and display) or using a Personal Computer with the aid of the ThySetter software. For safety reasons, a change of the following parameters become active only after an hw reset: - Relay nominal frequency (fn) - Ethernet communication parameters (IP host address, IP net mask, Autonegotiation).
WARNING
7.1 SW ThySetter
The ThySetter sw is a browser of data (setting, measure, etc..); it implements an engine that is afford to rebuild the menu set up and the relationships to data concerning all Thytronic protective relays by means of XML les.
ThySetter installation
The latest release of ThySetter can be downloaded free of charge from the www.thytronic.it site (PRODUCT/SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS/THY-SETTER/download area), or from www.pro-n.it site (Software pc - area download).
ThySetter use
Please refer to ThySetter user manual for detailed instructions. The document is available on www.pro-n.it site (Software pc - area download) or the www.thytronic. it site (PRODUCT/SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS/THY-SETTER/download area).
58
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
7.2
MMI (Man Machine Interface)

On the front panel there are eight buttons which allow the user to perform all the settings, reading and modication operations.
50N-51N (IE>, IE>>) 50-51 (I>, I>>, I>>>) CB OPEN (52a) CB CLOSED (52b) 79
Start Trip CB Open CB Close
The adjustment of the settings and the operation mode of the output relays must be performed while the unit is electrically powered; the alphanumeric display shows the necessary information with reference to the operations performed through the keyboard. All preset values are permanently stored in the nonvolatile memory. The buttons take the following operations: (Up) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options (Down) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options (Left) move the cursor upwards to the preceding menu options (Right) move the cursor downwards to the subsequent menu options (Enter) access to the selected menu with the option of modifying any given parameter (Reset) abort the current changes and/or accessing the previous menu
At power-up, the display shows the text: THYTRONIC NA011-a date and time: (01/01/2000 00:00 The ON green Led points out the auxiliary power supply voltage (permanent lighted) and possible faults (blink lighted). The display backlight is automatically activated when any key switch is set. By means of the (Up) or (Down) buttons, it is possible to cyclically browse through the menu options: Read, Set, Oscillography, Communication, Test, Reset, Time, Option Having identied the sub-menu of interest, it is possible to gain access by using the (Right) button (Up) or (Down) buttons. and then analogously, run through the relevant options by using the The full menu tree and some examples are showed in the following pages (numerical values and settings are pointed out as examples and does not agree with real situations.
Reading variables (READ)

All data (measure, settings, parameters, etc...) may be displayed: Measures > Digital inputs > AutoReclose - 79 > Circuit breaker > Counters > Last fault > Info > Protection trip > Self-test >
Setting modifying (SET)

To effect a change, having identied the parameter intended for change, the following procedure must be performed: , and keys. Select the parameter going through the menus by means the key; the he modication in progress status is high Begin the setting phase by means of the lighted by the symbol E ashing in the upper right area of the display. Change the parameter by means the
SETTING AND COMMISSIONING NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
(increment) or
(decrement) buttons.
59
(Enter) button; acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the Press the ashing E to be replaced by the symbol !. On must be remember that changes are NOT active until the Store command, located in the Set menu has been used; in this regard, once the Store message is displayed, it is necessary to use the execute message with the symbol C ashing. Browse the menu by means of the Press the and or keys to go in the Store menu. (Enter) button; once more concludes the save procedure with the temporary appear(Enter) button; this results in the
ance of the message ok!. After one or more modications, the status of having data that has still not been permanently saved is indicated by the ! symbol in the top right and the display message WARNING set Clear.. Store which appears while browsing through the main menu with the use of the or keys. The Clear command may be used to abandon unsaved changes (prior to use of the Store command); the same effect is achieved by switching the key to the OFF position or removing the auxiliary power supply to the relay.
Example
To set the K1 relay with Energized mode and latched mode (Energized, Latched) the following sequence must be operated: Select the Set menu Set >by means of the Press the key. key; the message Base > is displayed.
Browse the menus with Relays > 50/51 > 50N/51N > AutoReclose - 79 > Circuit breaker > Clear > Store > Select the Relays >, menu; the message K1 None > is displayed. Press the key; the message K1 Logic De-energized is displayed. key; the he modication in progress status is highlighted by the symbol E ashing in Press the the upper right area of the display. Change the parameter by means the displayed. or keys; the message K1 Logic Energized is
key; acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the ashing E Press the to be replaced by the symbol !. Press the key; the message K1 mode No-latched is displayed. key; acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the ashing E Press the to be replaced by the symbol !. Change the parameter by means the mode Latched is displayed. (increment) or (decrement) buttons; the message K1
(Enter) button; acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the Press the ashing E to be replaced by the symbol ! Press the Press the key and or to go inside the Store menu. key; this results in the execute ? message with the symbol C ashing.
key to conrm setting. Answer with The end of the setting sequence is signalled by the ok! message. key may be used to abort unsaved changes (prior to use of the Store command); the The Reset same effect is achieved by switching the key to the OFF position or removing the auxiliary power supply to the NA011 relay.
Test
The operational tests with or without command of the associated output relays may be performed. Browse the main menu by means the the Test I> led Test I>> led Test I>>> led Test IE> led Test IE>> led Test I> full Test I>> full Test I>>> full
60 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 SETTING AND COMMISSIONING
or
keys until the Test message is displayed; press or keys.
key to enter and subsequently select the test by means of the
Test IE> full Test IE>> full
Example
To set the K1 test on the I> element, the following sequence must be operate: Select the Test I> full > menu. Press the key to enter ; this results in the execute ? message with the symbol C ashing. key to enter; the test in progress condition is marked by ok! message and blinking Press the of the led ON.[1] To stop test select the Test off > menu, press the tion of the key and answer with a further activakey to the Test off execute? >> message.
Communication
Inside the Communication menu the setting data of the serial communication ports (rate, stop bit, parity and address) for RS485 Modbus and IEC60870-5-103 may be adjusted. Browse the main menu by means the or keys until the Protocol RS485 Modbus > key to enter; the he modication in progress status is highlighted message is displayed; press the by the symbol E ashing in the upper right area of the display. or Select the right menu by means of the Protocol RS485 IEC60870-5-103 > keys Protocol RS485 Modbus > or
or keys adjust the address; the Address 1 message is displayed and By means of the enter the intended value. Similarly for all the parameters: Address 1 Baudrate RS485 9600 Enable TX delay 2 ms Start TX delay 2 ms By means of the Press the key and next or go inside the Store menu. key; this results in the execute ? message with the symbol C ashing.
key to conrm setting Answer with The end of the setting sequence is signalled by the ok! message. key may be used to abort unsaved changes (prior to use of the Store command); the The Reset h same effect is achieved by switching the key to the OFF position or removing the auxiliary power supply to the NA011 relay.
Reset
Inside the Reset menu the clearing of counters (Reset counters) LEDs and relays (Reset alarm) may be operated.
DEFAULT (Option)
Available inside the Option menu are the conguration parameter reset (Default) commands. Set default PAR Set default REE In case of any anomalies detected by the self-test function, where conguration data has become corrupted, it is possible to restore the factory default settings. In particular, using the command Set default PAR, the calibration data is restored (thresholds, times, output relay assignment etc), whilst with the command Set default REE all the updated variables (counters, ...etc) and the serial communication parameters are automatically reset. Except for extraordinary situations, it is not necessary to use such commands which in any case allow the restoration of the factory set default values following an anomaly. Following use of this command, it is necessary to then proceed with the setting of the desired settings and/or the calibration of the voltages just as in the case for first installation.
Data/time setting (Time)

To effect a change, (year, month,...) the modication may be conrmed by using the key. Likewise the Set menu the modication in progress status is highlighted by the symbol E ashing in the upper right area of the display. or keys (the E symbol Subsequently, it is possible to change the parameter by means of the continues to flash to highlight the Editing status); upon reaching the desired value, it is necessary key. Acceptance of the change is indicated by the disappearance of the to once more use the flashing E to be replaced by the symbol !. Differently from the Set menu the changes are stored and became active immediately without the Store command.
Circuit breaker commands

By means of the (Open) and (Close) keys the circuit breaker command may be issued. The committed output relays must be enabled inside the Set \ Relays menu.
Note 1 The tests are active only if the selected function is assigned to an output relay
SETTING AND COMMISSIONING NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 61
7.3
MENU TREE Description Parameter Unit Setting range
Read Info Code Serial Firmware release nominal freq. Clock Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Measures IL1 IL2 IL3 IE Inp value Inp unit IEnp value IEnp unit Reading Protections trip Protections trip AutoReclose - 79 79 ActiveMode 79 Run 79 CycleStyle 79 Residual-time 79 LastEvent Circuit breaker Position Digital inputs IN1 - 52b IN3 - 52a IN3 - 79 Counters Counter ST I> Counter ST I>> Counter ST I>>> Counter ST IE> Counter ST IE>> Counter TR I> Counter TR I>> Counter TR I>>> Counter TR IE> Counter TR IE>>
62 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
NA011-CB0-b 0.0 0 50 2000 ... 2099 step = 1 1 ... 12 step = 1 1 ... 31 step = 1 h m s A/In A/In A/In 0 ... 23 step = 1 0 ... 59 step = 1 0 ... 59 step = 1 0 ... 0 step = 0 0 ... 0 step = 0 0 ... 0 step = 0
Hz
A/IEn 0 ... 0 step = 0 1 ... 99 step = 1 100 ... 1000 step = 5 A 1 ... 99 step = 1 100 ... 1000 step = 5 A Direct None OFF OFF Reset s 0 ... 0 step = 0 None Unknown OFF OFF OFF 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1
Description
Parameter
Counter 79 RR Counter 79 SR Counter 79 DR Counter 79 FR P Counter 79 FR E Counter 79 FR X
Unit
Setting range
0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 0 ... 10000 step = 1 None None None
Self-test Self-test Self-test cause Self-test latch Faults Info Faults stored Last fault Fault F-Number F-Cause F-Phases F-IL1 F-IL2 F-IL3 F-IE F-Year F-Month F-Day F-Hour F-Minute F-Second F-Millisecond Reset Events Info Events stored Last event Event E-Number E-cause E-Year E-Month E-Day E-Hour E-Minute E-Second E-Millisecond Reset Set Base Inp value Inp unit IEnp value A 1 ... 99 step = 1 100 ... 1000 step = 5 1 ... 99 step = 1 100 ... 1000 step = 5 h m s ms 2000 ... 2099 step = 1 1 ... 12 step = 1 1 ... 31 step = 1 0 ... 23 step = 1 0 ... 59 step = 1 0 ... 59 step = 1 0 ... 999 step = 1 0 ... 50 step = 1 0 ... 50 step = 1 h m s ms In In In IEn 0 ... 20 step = 1 None None 0 ... 0 step = 0 0 ... 0 step = 0 0 ... 0 step = 0 0 ... 0 step = 0 2000 ... 2099 step = 1 1 ... 12 step = 1 1 ... 31 step = 1 0 ... 23 step = 1 0 ... 59 step = 1 0 ... 59 step = 1 0 ... 999 step = 1 0 ... 20 step = 1 0 ... 20 step = 1
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
63
Description
Parameter
IEnp unit Reading
Unit
A
Setting range
Direct/Relative None De-energized/Energized No-latched/Latched
Relays K1 K1 logic K1 mode K1 tTR K2 K2 logic K2 mode K2 tTR K3 K3 logic K3 mode K3 tTR K4 K4 logic K4 mode K4 tTR AutoReclose - 79 79 Enable 79 Mode 79 N.DAR 79 trdt 79 tsdt 79 td 79 tr 79 MC-td-EN 79 MO-RES 79 Trigger 79 IN3 select 50/51 I> Element I> Setpoint I>Curve ICLP> tCLP> t>RES I> Denite I>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 2.50 step = 0.01 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 2.50 step = 0.01 s ms DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEEE MI , ANSI/IEEE VI, ANSI/IEEE EI Off, On Bloching, On Changing 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1 0 ... 1000 step = 10 s s s s OFF Rapid/ Rapid+Slow 0 ... 5 step = 1 0.1 ... 19.9 step = 0.1 20 ... 60 step = 1 1 ... 200 step = 1 0 ... 10 step = 1 1 ... 200 step = 1 OFF OFF None None ms ms ms ms
10 ... 500 step = 10 None De-energized/Energized No-latched/Latched 10 ... 500 step = 10 None De-energized/Energized No-latched/Latched 10 ... 500 step = 10 None De-energized/Energized No-latched/Latched 10 ... 500 step = 10
ICLP>def t>def I> Inverse I>inv ICLP>inv
In s In In
64
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
Description
Parameter
t>inv
Unit
s
Setting range
0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
I>> Element I>> Setpoint ICLP>> tCLP>> t>>RES I>> Denite I>>def In 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01 s ms Off, On Bloching, On Changing 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1 0 ... 1000 step = 10
ICLP>>def t>>def I>>> Element I>>> Setpoint ICLP>>> tCLP>>> t>>>RES I>>> Denite I>>>def
In s
s ms
Off, On Bloching, On Changing 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1 0 ... 1000 step = 10 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1 0.100 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 20.0 step = 0.1 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01
In
ICLP>>>def t>>>def 50N/51N IE> Element IE> Setpoint IE>Curve IECLP> tECLP> tE>RES IE> Denite IE>def IECLP>def tE>def IE> Inverse IE>inv IECLP>inv tE>inv IE>> Element IE>> Setpoint IECLP>> tECLP>> tE>>RES IE>> Denite
SETTING AND COMMISSIONING NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
In s
s ms IEn IEn s In In s
DEFINITE, IEC/BS A, IEC/BS B, IEC/BS C, ANSI/IEEE MI , ANSI/IEEE VI, ANSI/IEEE EI Off, On Bloching, On Changing 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1 0 ... 1000 step = 10 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 2.00 step = 0.01 0.02 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 60.0 step = 0.1
s ms
Off, On Bloching, On Changing 0.00 ... 9.99 step = 0.01 10.0 ... 100.0 step = 0.1 0 ... 1000 step = 10
65
Description
Parameter
IE>>def IECLP>>def tE>>def
Unit
IEn IEn s
Setting range
0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01 0.005 ... 0.999 step = 0.001 1.00 ... 5.00 step = 0.01 0.03 ... 10.00 step = 0.01 None, Trip I>, Trip I>>, Trip I>>>, Trip IE>, Trip IE>> 0.10 ... 0.99 step = 0.01 1.00 ... 10.00 step = 0.05 None, 52a, 52b, 52a/52b
Breaker failure BF Enable tBF Circuit breaker CB check Store Oscillography Info Record stored Last stored Recorded state Setting Pre-trigger Trigger Trigger aux Digital channel Analog channel 1 Analog channel 2 Analog channel 3 Analog channel 4 Communication Protocol RS485 Address Baudrate RS485 Enable TX delay Start TX delay ms ms Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 1 ... 247 step = 1 1200, 2400., 4800, 9600, 19200, 38499, 57600 0 ... 50 step = 1 0 ... 10 step = 1 T 0 ... 63 step = 1 None, Manual, General start, General trip, IN1, IN2, IN3, K1, K2, K3, K4, Auxiliary Start I<, Start I>>, Start I>>>, Start IE>, Start IE>>, Trip I>, Trip I>>, RTrip I>>>, Trip IE>, Trip IE>> General start, General trip, IN1, IN2, IN3, K1, K2, K3, K4 OFF, iL1, iL2, iL3, iE, measure IL1, measure IL2, measure IL3, measure IE OFF, iL1, iL2, iL3, iE, measure IL1, measure IL2, measure IL3, measure IE OFF, iL1, iL2, iL3, iE, measure IL1, measure IL2, measure IL3, measure IE OFF, iL1, iL2, iL3, iE, measure IL1, measure IL2, measure IL3, measure IE 0 ... 2 step = 1 0 ... 2 step = 1 Init s
66
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
7.4
MAINTENANCE
The devices do not require any particular maintenance; all circuits use high quality static components, the subassembly products undergo dynamic checks on their functioning before the nal assembling of the complete equipment. The dedicated circuits and the rmware for the self-test function continuously check the relay operation; the continuously operating auto-zeroing function dynamically corrects the measuring errors due to offset, heat dependent drifts, aging of components, etc. The microprocessor is equipped with a watch-dog circuit which restores the correct operation of the rmware in case of fault. The possibility of reading the value of the signals measured on the display (the relay used as an ammeter) allows one to check both the system parameters and the operation of the protection relays at any time. The relay can be preset as well to show the current values referred to the nominal current of the current transformers, as directly in primary amperes (according to the preset value of CTs nominal primary current); the same is done for the input voltages. If connected to the central control unit, all data available on the display can be checked and processed thus performing a continuous check and maintenance.
7.5
REPAIR
No repair of possible faults by the client is foreseen; if following to any irregularity of operation, the above tests conrm the presence of a fault, it will be necessary to send the relay to the factory for the repair and the consequent settings and checks.
7.6
PACKAGING
The devices must be stored within the required temperature limits; the relative humidity should not cause condensation or formation of frost. It is recommended that the devices are stored in their packaging; in the case of long storage, especially in extreme climatic conditions, it is recommended that the device is supplied with power for some hours before the commissioning, in order to bring the circuits to the rating conditions and to stabilize the operation of the components.
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
67
8
8.1 APPENDIX A1 - Inverse time IEC curves
APPENDIX
Mathematical formula
The mathematical formula, according the IEC 60255-3/BS142 standards is:[1]
t = t > inv
K [(I/I> inv)-1]
Where: t = operate time (in seconds) t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds) I = input current I >inv = threshold setting
K coefcient:
K = 0.14 for IEC-A curve (Normal inverse) K = 13.5 for IEC-B curve (Very inverse) K = 80 for IEC-C curve (Extremely inverse)
curve shape constant:
= 0.02 for IEC-A curve (Normal inverse) = 1 for IEC-B curve (Very inverse) = 2 for IEC-C curve (Extremely inverse) For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies: Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I >inv Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 I /I >inv 20 If I > pickup 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In
Note 1 Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and 50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section Note 2 When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point Nota 3 With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50 In and 10 IEn respectively.
68 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)
t [s]
10000
t = t > inv
0.14 [(I/I> inv)0.02-1]
1000
t > inv = 60 s 100
t > inv = 10 s
10
t > inv = 5 s
t > inv = 1 s
t > inv = 0.5 s
t > inv = 0.2 s
t > inv = 0.1 s
0.1
t > inv = 0.02 s
0.01 1.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I /I>inv
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 700
F_51-IECA-Char.ai
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
69
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)
t [s]
10000
t = t > inv
13.5 [(I/I> inv) -1]
1000
100
t > inv = 60 s
10 t > inv = 10 s
t > inv = 5 s
1 t > inv = 1 s
t > inv = 0.5 s t > inv = 0.1 s
t > inv = 0.2 s 0.1 t > inv = 0.02 s
0.01 1.1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20
I /I>inv
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 14.5
F_51-IECB-Char.ai
70
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)
t [s] 100000
t = t > inv
80 [(I/I> inv)2-1]
10000
1000
100
10
t > inv = 60 s
t > inv = 10 s 1 t > inv = 5 s
t > inv = 1 s 0.1 t > inv = 0.02 s t > inv = 0.1 s t > inv = 0.2 s t > inv = 0.5 s
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
I /I >inv
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when I/I>inv = 9
F_51-IECC-Char.ai
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
71
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Standard inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type A)
t [s]
10000
t = t E> inv
0.14 [(IE/IE> inv)0.02-1]
1000
t E>inv = 60 s
100
t E>inv = 10 s
10
t E>inv = 5 s
t E>inv = 1 s
t E>inv = 0.5 s
t E>inv = 0.2 s
t E>inv = 0.1 s
0.1
t E>inv = 0.02 s
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
IE /IE >inv
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 700
F_51N-IECA-Char.ai
72
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type B)
t [s]
10000
t = t E> inv
13.5 [(IE/IE> inv) -1]
1000
100
t E>inv = 60 s
10
t E>inv = 10 s
t E>inv = 5 s
1
t E>inv = 1 s
t E>inv = 0.5 s t E>inv = 0.1 s t E>inv = 0.2 s
0.1
t E>inv = 0.02 s
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
I E /IE >inv
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 14.5
F_51N-IECB-Char.ai
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
73
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (IEC 60255-3/BS142 type C)
t [s] 100000
t = t E> inv
80 [(IE/IE> inv)2-1]
10000
1000
100
10
t E> inv = 60 s
t E> inv = 10 s
1
t E> inv = 5 s
t E> inv = 1 s
0.1
t E> inv = 0.02 s t E> inv = 0.1 s t E> inv = 0.2 s t E> inv = 0.5 s
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
IE /IE >inv
Note: match of operating and setting time takes place when IE /IE >inv = 9
F_51-IECC-Char.ai
74
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
APPENDIX
8.2
APPENDIX A2 - Inverse time ANSI/IEEE curves

The mathematical formula, according the ANSI/IEEE standards is:[1] K +L [(I/I> inv)-1]
Mathematical formula
t = t > inv
Where: t = operate time (in seconds) t I>inv = setting time multiplier (in seconds) I = input current I >inv = threshold setting
K coefficient:
K = 0.01 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve K = 3.922 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve K = 5.64 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve = 0.02 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve = 2 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve L = 0.023 for ANSI/IEEE Moderately inverse curve L = 0.098 for ANSI/IEEE Very inverse curve L = 0.024 for ANSI/IEEE Extremely inverse curve For all inverse time characteristics, following data applies: Asymptotic reference value (minimum pickup value): 1.1 I >inv Minimum operate time: 0.1 s Range where the equation is valid:[2][3] 1.1 I /I >inv 20 If I > pickup 2.5 In, the upper limit is 50 In
curve shape constant:
L coefficient:
Note Symbols are concerning the overcurrent element. The comprehensive overview of the inverse time characteristics concerning the 50/51 and 50N/51N elements is dealt within the PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS section Note When the input value is more than 20 times the set point , the operate time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point Nota With setting more than 2.5 In for the 50/51 elements and 0.5 IEn for the 50N/51N elements, the upper limit of the measuring range is limited to 50 In and 10 IEn respectively.
APPENDIX NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 75
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)
t [s]
10000
t = t > inv
5.64 + 0.024 [(I/I> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t > inv = 60 s
1
t > inv = 0.02 s t > inv = 0.1 s t > inv = 0.2 s t > inv = 0.5 s t > inv = 1 s t > inv = 5 s t > inv = 10 s
0.1
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
I /I >inv
F_51-ANSIEI-Char.ai
76
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
APPENDIX
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)
t [s]
10000
t = t > inv
0.01 + 0.023 [(I/I> inv)0.02 -1]
1000
100
10
t > inv = 60 s
t > inv = 10 s
t > inv = 5 s
t > inv = 0.1 s t > inv = 0.2 s
t > inv = 0.5 s
t > inv = 1 s
0.1
t > inv = 0.02 s
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
I /I >inv
F_51-ANSIMI-Char.ai
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
77
Phase overcurrent 50/51 - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)
t [s]
10000
t = t > inv
3.922 + 0.092 [(I/I> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t > inv = 60 s
1
t > inv = 0.02 s t > inv = 0.1 s t > inv = 0.2 s t > inv = 0.5 s
t > inv = 10 s
t > inv = 5 s
0.1
t > inv = 1 s
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
I /I >inv
F_51-ANSIVI-Char.ai
78
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Moderately inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type MI)
t [s]
10000
t = t E> inv
5.64 + 0.024 [(IE/IE> inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t E > inv = 60 s
1
t E > inv = 0.02 s t E > inv = 0.1 s t E > inv = 0.2 s t E > inv = 0.5 s t E > inv = 1 s t E > inv = 5 s t E > inv = 10 s
0.1
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
IE /IE >inv
F_51N-ANSIEI-Char.ai
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
79
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Very inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type VI)
t [s]
10000
t = t E> inv
0.01 + 0.023 [(IE/IE> inv)0.02 -1]
1000
100
10
t E > inv = 60 s
t E > inv = 10 s
t E > inv = 5 s
t E > inv = 0.1 s t E > inv = 0.2 s
t E > inv = 0.5 s
t E > inv = 1 s
0.1
t E > inv = 0.02 s
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
IE /IE >inv
F_51N-ANSIMI-Char.ai
80
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
APPENDIX
Residual overcurrent 50N/51N - Extremely inverse time curve (ANSI/IEEE type EI)
t [s]
10000
t = tE > inv
3.922 + 0.092 [(IE /IE > inv)2 -1]
1000
100
10
t E > inv = 60 s
1
t E > inv = 0.02 s t E > inv = 0.1 s t E > inv = 0.2 s t E > inv = 0.5 s
t E > inv = 10 s
t E > inv = 5 s
0.1
t E > inv = 1 s
0.01 1.1
7 8 9 10
20
IE /IE >inv
F_51N-ANSIVI-Char.ai
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
81
8.2
Note:
APPENDIX B1 - I/O Diagram

Some typical connection diagram are shown. All diagram must be considered just as example; they cannot be comprehensive for real applications. For all diagrams the output contacts are shown in de-energized state for standard reference. The residual current input (pin C7-C8) is available on NA011#xxx2 and NA011#xxx3 versions
Traditional CT input circuits
Low powerCT input circuits (LPCTs)
NA011
C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C7 C8 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 CURRENT INPUTS
IL1
NA011
A2 A1 A3 A4 A6 A5 A9 A8 A7 A11 A12 A10
L1 L2 L3
CURRENT INPUTS
C1
K1
K1
IL2
A5 A4 A6 A9 A8 A7 A3 A2 A1 A11 A12 A10
OUTPUT RELAYS
IL3
K3
OUTPUT RELAYS
K2
K2
C7 C8 C7 C8
IE NA011#xxx3
K3
IE NA011#xxx2
K4 NA011#xxx0
K4 NA011#xxx1
IN1
A13
CIrcuit Breaker Position

IN2
A14 A15 A16 A17 A18
IN1
CIrcuit Breaker Position

IN2
IN3
79 IN3 Select
IN3
79 IN3 Select
A19 A20
UAUX
A19 A20 A+ 3 B2 E1 120 1 A21 A22
UAUX
FRONT PANEL
FRONT PANEL
RS485
RS232
RS232
RS485
A+ 3 B2 E1 120 1
A21 A22
alternative versions to be selected when ordering
Input-output circuits
82 NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
NA016-I-O.ai
APPENDIX
8.3
APPENDIX B2 - Interfaces
NA011
FRONT PANEL
RS232
RS485
A+ 3 B2 E1 120 1
A21 A22
Interfaces.ai
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
83
8.4
APPENDIX B3 - Connection diagrams
DG
NA011
P1 S1 S2
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8
IL1
P2
IL2
50/51
IL3
50N/51N
NA011#xxx0
P1 P2
S1 S2
C7 C8
IE
50N/51N
NA011#xxx2
A13 A14
CB position
IN1
A15 A16 A17 A18
Circuit Breaker Position

IN2
IN3
79 IN3 Select
84
Three phase CTs and residual current from core balanced CT (NA011#xxx2) or calculated (NA011#xxx0)
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
APPENDIX
DG
NA011
P1 S1 S2
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 IL2 50/51 IL1
P2
IL3
P1 P2
S1 S2
C7 C8
IE
50N/51N Note 1
A13 A14 IN1

CB position
A15 A16 IN2 A17 A18 IN3
Circuit Breaker Position
79 IN3 Select
Note 1: when only two phase CTs are available, the residual current must be measured (cannot be calculated from the phase currents)
Two phase CTs and residual current from core balanced CT

APPENDIX NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
NA016-SCH2.ai
85
Example of connection diagram with traditional CT inputs and acquisition of CB states and Auto Reclose enable/start
+UAUX
DG
52a
52b
NA011
K1 A2 A1 A3 A4 A6 A5 A9 A8 A7 A11 A12 A10
P2
S1 S2
C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
IL1
CTs CURRENT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
50N/51N 50N/51N
P1
C1
K2
IL2
K3
IL3
K4
C7 C8
P1 P2 S1 S2
NA011#xxx0
C7 C8
IE
NA011#xxx2
A13 A14 IN1 A15

-UAUX
CB position
A16 IN2
79 Enable/79 External trip

+UAUX -UAUX
A17 A18 IN3 A19 A20
79 IN3 Select
UAUX
FRONT PANEL
RS485
A+ 3 B2 E1 120 1
A21 A22
86
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
RS232
APPENDIX
Example of connection diagram with low power CT inputs and acquisition of CB states and Auto Reclose enable/start
+UAUX
DG
52a
52b
NA011
K1
P1 P2
A5 A4 A6 A9 A8 A7 A3 A2 A1 A11 A12 A10
6 4 + 6 4 + 6 -
L1 L2
IL1
LPCT Setting
OUTPUT RELAYS
S1 S2
4 +
K2
IL2
L3
50 A 100 A 200 A 400 A 800 A In=50...1250A
K3
IL3
K4
C7 C8
P1 P2 S1 S2
50N/51N
NA011#xxx1
C7 C8 A13 A14 IN1 A15

-UAUX
IE
50N/51N
NA011#xxx3
CB position
A16 IN2
79 Enable/79 External trip

+UAUX -UAUX
A17 A18 IN3 A19 A20
79 IN3 Select
UAUX
FRONT PANEL
RS232
RS485
A+ 3 B2 E1 120 1
A21 A22
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
87
8.5
APPENDIX C - Dimensions REAR VIEW

107 101
D1
FRONT VIEW
101
D1
C1
C2 RX TX F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 B1
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 B2 B3 B4 B5 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22
3
L1
LPCT Setting
L2
1 2 3 4 5
RX TX
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8
1 2 3 4 5
L3
C3
C4
1 2 3 4 5
171 149
177
171 149
ON
START TRIP
C5
C6
B6 B7 B8
50 100 200 400 800
EX. In = 300A (100+200)
C7
C8
C7
C8
3
E1
E1
Traditional CT inputs
Low power CT inputs
SIDE VIEW
75 30
CUTOUT
102.5 0.3 70
161 154
N.4 holes 3.5
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
LEDs
ON & Diagnostic
In
5A 1A
5A
UAUX 24-230 Vac/dc 1 2 3 4 5

In 5A 1A 5A IEn 1A 1A 5A UAUX 24-230 Vac/dc 1 2 3 4 5

Start Trip
NA011#xxx0
In Rated 50...500A In Extended 50...1250A UAUX 24-230 V 1 2 3 4 5
NA011#xxx2
In Rated 50...500A In Extended 50...1250A
IEn 1A 1A 5A
UAUX 24-230 V
1 2 3 4 5
NA011#xxx1
88
NA011#xxx3
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010 APPENDIX
8.6
DSP Firmware Release 1.00 1.16
APPENDIX D - Revisions history

SW Release Documentation Communication Upgrade procedures Description
NA011-Manual-08-2009 NA011-Manual-05-2010
ThySetter 3.5.3 ThySetter 3.5.7
1.16 1.16
NA011-Manual-05-2010 NA011-Manual-05-2010
ThySetter 3.5.8 ThySetter 3.6.0
First edition Added references to versions with / without residual input current, inverse time on the 50N/51N element, Cold Load Pickup (CLP), Breaker Failure (BF) Correct numbering on output relay for LPCT version (different from the CTs versions) Typographical details Correct error inside pag.25 (Automatic reclosing enable/external trip schematic)
APPENDIX
NA011 - Manual - 05 - 2010
89
8.7
APPENDIX E - EC Declaration of conformity
Manufacturer: Address:
THYTRONIC S.p.A. Piazza Mistral 7 - 20139 MILANO
The undersigned manufacturer herewith declares that the product

Protection relay - type NA011
is in conformity with the previsions of the following EC directives (including all applicable amendments) when installed in accordance with the installation instructions:
Reference n 2006/95/EC 2004/108/EC title Low Voltage Directive EMC Directive
Reference of standards and/or technical specifications applied for this declaration of conformity or parts thereof: - harmonized standards:
nr EN 61010-1 EN 50263 issue 11.2001 08.2000 title Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Product standard for measuring relays and protection equipments Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Emission standard for industrial environments Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Immunity standard for industrial environments
EN 61000-6-4 (EN 50081-2)
11.2007
EN 61000-6-2 (EN 50082-2)
12.2005
- other standards and/or technical specifications:

nr CEI 0-16 issue 07.2008 title Regola tecnica di riferimento per la connessione di Utenti attivi e passivi alle reti AT e MT delle imprese distributrici di energia elettrica Electromechanical elementary relays General and safety requirements Electrical relays - Part 6: General requirements for measuring relays and protection equipment Electrical relays
EN 61810-1
02.2004
EN 60255-6 (CEI 95-1) IEC 60255
05.1998
Year of CE marking: 2009
Signature ............................................. Name FIORE Ing. GIOACCHINO Title Managing director Date 07-2009
Headquarter: 20139 Milano - Piazza Mistral, 7 - Tel. +39 02 574 957 01 ra - Fax +39 02 574 037 63 Factory: 35127 Padova - Z.I. Sud - Via dellArtigianato, 48 - Tel. +39 049 894 770 1 ra - Fax +39 049 870 139 0
www.thytronic.it
thytronic@thytronic.it
www.pro-n.it

Data Elecin

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Data Elecin

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SUB ESTACION MODULAR COMPACTA 24KV, 20KA 60Hz.

FUNDICION CHILCA CHILCA - LIMA FUNDICION CHILCA S.A.

- Manuales de Equipos varios.

III.- DOCUMENTACION TECNICA

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

TIPO SYStem6 ITB ACC-347-381

MARCA SAREL SAREL 500.12.038R1 (Item-01)

Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

TESAR 500.12.029 (Item-03) N 2012-15-0175-03-04 N 2012-15-0175-03-05 N 2012-15-0175-03-06

1 : 27, 49, 50/51, 50N/51N, 79 : 24Vcc : 1/5A

THYTRONIC 500.12.058R1 (Item-02)

Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

1 : : : : 72 220 24 5 W. Vac. Vcc. A.

DEEP SEA ELECTRONIC

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

TIPO A1R-LQ+ N 14643644

SAREL (500.12.038R1) (Item-02)

SAREL SAREL Ital Weber Moeller Fantini Cosmi

BCH Xpole Pls4 C16

Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

TESAR (500.11.049) (Item-05) N 2012-15-0175-04-02 N 2012-15-0175-04-03 N 2012-15-0684-05-06

SAREL (500.12.038R1) (Item-03)

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

3 3 1 1 WL N 5763-2012 N 5766-2012 N 5767-2012

SAREL SAREL SAREL

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

TIPO MARCA N 2012-15-0408-03-04 N 2012-15-0408-03-05 N 2012-15-0408-03-06 N 2012-15-0408-02-10 N 2012-15-0408-02-11 N 2012-15-0408-02-12

THYTRONIC (500.12.058R1) (Item-01)

N 165271 N 165274 N 166438 N 166435

Xpole Pls4 XB4-BA31 XB4-BA42 XB4-BV63 XB4-BV64

Moeller Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique

Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

TIPO C16 S/T

MARCA Fantini Cosmi SAREL

SAREL (500.12.038R1) (Item-03)

IM6S-TD N 71997-2012 N71999-2012

SAREL SAREL SAREL

Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

TESAR (500.12.029) (Item-01) N 2012-15-0408-01-04 N 2012-15-0408-01-05 N 2012-15-0408-01-06 N 2012-15-0408-01-01 N 2012-15-0408-01-02 N 2012-15-0408-01-03

1 : 50/51, 50N/51N, 79 : 24Vcc

NA011 N 165275 N 165276

THYTRONIC (500.12.058R1) (Item-01)

Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.

LISTADO DE APARATOS N 100.12.212

Xpole Pls4 XB4-BA31 XB4-BA42 XB4-BV63 XB4-BV64 C16 S/T

Moeller Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique Telemecanique Fantini Cosmi SAREL

OBSERVACIONES: Rev 0 : 9-ago-2012 Rev 1 : 5-oct-2012 Rev 2 : 11-oct-2012 Rev 3 :

Elaborado por : Fernando Castillo O. Revisado por : Ing. Mario Cuya M.

IV.- PROTOCOLO DE PRUEBAS DE LOS EQUIPOS

EQUIPO: SUB ESTACION MODULAR COMPACTA 24KV, 20KA, 60Hz.

Sub Estacin Modular 24KV, 20KA, 60Hz. N ACC-347-381 N 2012.00.0427

M.T. : 5 kVcc B.T. : 500Vcc MD5060e MEGABRAS

Transformador de Prueba 81000/220 V

VERBALE DI COLLAUDO TRASFORMATORI DI CORRENTE

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS TEST REPORT RAPPORT DE ESSAI TRANSFORMATEURS DE COURANT

VC TA rev. 6 del 03.09.2008

Livello di isolamento [kV] 24 / 50 / 125

Type Type CARACTERISTIQUES

Insulation level Niveau disolement